Home

Owners Manual - ESD

1. Defroster Used to quickly remove mist ing and ice from the wind screen and side windows Air flowing to the windows The light in the defroster button illuminates when the function is active The following also takes place in order to pro vide maximum dehumidification in the passen ger compartment 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 EN 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 142 Climate control e the air conditioning is automatically engaged e recirculation and the air quality system are automatically disengaged The air conditioning can be disengaged man ually using the AC button When the defroster function is switched off the climate control sys tem returns to the previous settings Recirculation Air quality system Recirculation When recirculation is engaged the right hand PE orange light in the button illu minates The function is selected to shut out bad air exhaust gases etc from the passenger compartment The air in the passenger compartment is recircula ted e no outside air is taken into the car when this function is activated If the air in the car recirculates for too long there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows Timer With the timer function activated the system will exit manually activated recirculation mode according to a time that depends on the out side temperature This reduces the risk of ic
2. Rertote comiroLkey key blade 44 PEINE TO ER 1 Lin dered dussnccausss dueiercusaeencneencovrseccevendeevendecnee 49 Battery replacement remote control key PCC Gi Keyes STORES TT en ne cute sente anadai ananin aiaa aaa 53 POGKING UNIOGKINGsts teeters o er cents 56 Childisafety IGGKS aim tree ef nm re me A 61 A Re er re M at 62 42 Option accessory for more information see Introduction LOCKS AND ALARM 02 Locks and alarm 02 Remote control key key blade General The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys or PCCs Personal Car Communicator They are used to start the car and for locking and unlocking More remote control keys can be ordered up to 6 can be programmed and used for the same car The PCC has increased functionality com pared with the remote control key The contin uation of this chapter describes the functions available in both the PCC and the remote con trol key WARNING If there are children in the car Always remember to switch off the power supply to power windows and sunroof by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car Loss of a remote control key If you lose a remote control key then new ones can be ordered at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended The remain ing remote control keys must then be taken to the workshop The code of the missing remote 1 Only i
3. 76 Backrest rear seat lowering 79 Bag holder e sacicisstnceecheeea asin ceaceeeadenenduecneees 227 BALLON emision 2 1 313 Maintenance tanins 271 remote control key PCC 51 start assistance 111 symbols on the battery 271 warning SYMbOIS 271 Bioethanol ESS 4 221 Blind spot BLIS scsi 199 Blind Spot Information System BLIS 199 Bluetooth Hans ire 205 mute microphone 207 transfer call to mobile 207 Bonnet opening 256 Brake and clutch TDi 261 Brake WON eects eager eters a a see 84 Brak OS sass ass NU 118 anti lock braking system ABS 118 prake ld soon 84 brake SYSTEINT 5 ia 118 electric parking brake 122 Emergency Brake Assistance EBA 118 emergency brake lights 84 filling brake lui 261 symbols in the combined instrument o E E E E E E OE E 119 Built in PONS ie nn 210 Bulbs see Lighting 263 C Calls functions during a call 210 211 ICONE ee erotics 206 211 OD TAHO ME seen simenie 206 210 volume in phone 211 nn 211 Call waiting acond 211 Camera SeNSOP insistant 187 o een mie 282 Car care leather upholstery 284 Cargo area cargo COVER 230 A A S 86 Cad odo iodo 224 mounting POINTS 225 SATS UY Grille 229 A 228 Cargo COW asias 230 Car UPRO escondo 284
4. Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure Variant Tyre size V70 3 2 22999 LE LS T6 220 50 R 17 245 45 R 17 245 40 R 18 D5 225 9595 R 16 225 50 R 17 245 45 R 17 245 40 R 18 08 Speed km h 0 160 160 0 160 160 0 160 160 0 160 160 Load 1 3 persons Max load ECO pres sure Rear kPa front 230 280 230 270 220 260 230 260 210 280 210 270 210 260 210 260 260 300 260 290 260 270 260 270 Rear 260 300 260 290 260 270 260 270 Front rear kPa 260 260 260 260 01 10 00 11 08 Specifications Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure km h sure front Rear Rear Front rear kPa kPa kPa 260 Variant Tyre size V70 2 0 225 55 R 16 0 160 220 210 260 260 2 0F 225 50 R 17 160 260 260 270 270 29 245 45 R 17 D2 245 40 R 18 0 160 230 210 260 260 260 Ls 160 260 260 270 270 205 60 R 16 0 160 230 210 260 260 260 160 270 270 290 290 Temporary Spare Tyre max 80 420 420 420 420 A Economical driving B In certain countries there is the bar unit beside the SI unit Pascal 1 bar 100 kPa 08 gt gt 08 Specifications 01 10 00 111 Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure Variant Tyre size Speed Load 1 3 persons ECO pres XC70 km h sure Front rear LG All engines 215 65 R 16 O 160 230 230 260 260 260 235 55 R 17 160 240 240 280 280
5. 8 1 248 10 6 4 8 154 5 9 5 5 179 6 8 5 5 182 6 9 5 8 189 7 2 5 5 182 6 9 5 8 189 7 2 that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic version and without extra equipment The car s weight may increase depending on equipment This as well as how heavily the car is loaded increases fuel consumption and carbon diox ide emissions There are several reasons for increased fuel consumption compared with the table s val ues Examples of this are e The driver s driving style e Ifthe customer has specified wheels larger than those fitted as standard on the mod el s basic version then resistance increa ses e High speed results in increased wind resis tance e Fuel quality road and traffic conditions weather and the condition of the car Even a combination of the above mentioned examples can result in significantly improved consumption For further information please refer to the regulations referred to Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in a comparison with the EU driving cycles which are used in the certification of the car and on which the consumption figures in the table are based To bear in mind Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce consumption e Drive gently and avoid unnecessary accel eration as well as braking too hard e Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly select ECO tyre pressure for best results see the tyre pressure
6. 81 ce secvesncccstevesmnscarssasalenes 57 ae en oo i Stone chips and scratches 285 OO LAO 58 Ce ns Temperatuie A sl Marni cae 202 actual temperature 137 Signal input external 148 Sunroof Temperature control 141 SIM card 213 opening and closing 101 Testing the alarm system 63 e rennes 24 DICH PROTECTION ironico 102 a 442 Soot filter 222 el Cs Wick e TOR ot ad tas tracntfcldmatanttinytentncees 247 ventilation position 101 Soot filter full as a spare 222 Total airing function AP 56 137 Sunscreen SUNTO Of cooccccccnccnononanonanonannnos 102 Spare WINGS carioca 2 247 Guroo 2 Towbar temporary spare ENAA E E EEE EEEE EET 247 o detachable attachment D 234 Spin controlo iiiaae 168 Symbols 168 detachable removal aiic 235 indicator symbols 70 Spin control TUNCUOMN sense detente 168 information SYMbO S nn 70 Towbar see Towing equipment 232 Stability and traction control system 168 Warning SYMbOIS nn 70 TOWING RE de nee 237 Stability system a 168 Symbols and messages ne 238 A Sn a 284 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 188 TOWING CAD ACI Y visccccuscercsussninesdacensieesmisets 293 GHA BES STANCE eoecsccovcs cococechcsccssnivececsdevuce 111 Distance Alert 182 TOWING equipment 232 Sin dread 170 Driver Alert Control 191 Specit
7. IMPORTANT The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch Call a recovery service for recovery assistance Take out the towing eye that is located under the floor hatch in the cargo area The cover for the towing eye s attachment point is available in two variants which must be opened in different ways On certain cars with towbar fitted the towing eye cannot be attached in the rear bracket Attach the towrope in the towbar For this reason it is advisable to store the detachable towbar s towball in the car Recovery Call a recovery service for recovery assistance IMPORTANT Note that the car must always be transpor ted with the wheels rolling forward e AnAll Wheel Drive car AWD with raised front suspension must not be towed at speeds above 70 km h It should not be towed further than 50 km 05 During your journey AN N A unes E ne menet ann aneneensnuteeeedenntinuene 242 AR SS A o O 246 re PRESSURE a er ee 248 Warning triana ad nee ne me ene 249 Emergency punet ur rtepairt MK Eee er ent gill wee 250 240 Option accessory for more information see Introduction WHEELS AND TYRES NE y 06 Wheels and tyres 06 Driving characteristics Tyres greatly affect the car s driving characte ristics The type of tyre dimensions tyre pres sure and speed rating are important for how the car performs Directi
8. Incoming call Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up the privacy handset If the privacy handset is off the hook when the phone rings then calls must be received using ENTER End calls by pressing EXIT or by hanging up the privacy handset Refuse calls using EXIT Automatic answer See page 207 Call waiting The function enables a new call to be answered during an ongoing call The new call is answered as usual and the previous call is put on hold Activate deactivate under Call options gt Call waiting Automatic diversions Incoming calls can be diverted automatically depending on the type of call and situation Activate deactivate under Call options gt Diversions During a call Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access the In call menu To call 1 Put the call on hold under Hold 2 Dialthe number of the third party or use the Phone book menu option Switch between calls using the Swap menu option Conference call A conference call consists of several parties It can be initiated when a call is underway and another is on hold The Join menu option starts the conference call All ongoing calls are disconnected if the con ference call is terminated Switching between the privacy handset and handsfree Switch from handsfree to the privacy hand set by picking up the privacy handset or selecting in the menu Switch from the privacy handset to handsfree using the Hand
9. 1 Turn the thumbwheel 1 until the DSTC menu is shown DSTC ON means that the system function is unchanged DSTC spin control OFF means that sys tem operation is reduced 2 Press and hold RESET 2 until the DSTC menu is changed The system will remain reduced until the engine is switched off after the engine is started the next time DSTC is back in its normal mode again WARNING The car s driving characteristics may dete riorate if the function is reduced Messages in the information display DSTC Temporarily OFF means that the sys tem has been temporarily reduced due to excessive temperature in the brake discs The function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled DSTC Service required system disabled due to a fault Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine gt Ifthe message remains when the engine is restarted drive to a workshop An authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended Symbols in the combined instrument panel If the symbols Eh and are shown at the same time read the message on the infor mation display 04 Comfort and driving pleasure D DSTC Stability and traction control system If the symbol appears alone then it may appear as follows e Flashing light means that the system is now being activated e Constant glow for 2 seconds means sys tem check when the engine is started e Constant glow after starting the engine or while driving
10. Forward backward lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and ped als Check that the seat is locked after changing position Raise lower front edge of seat cushion pump up down Adjust backrest rake turn the wheel 5 Raise lower the seat pump up down O Control panel for power seat 1 Also applies to power seat WARNING Adjust the position of the driver s seat before setting off never while driving Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident Lowering the front seat backrest G043898 The passenger seat backrest can be folded forward to make room for long loads 13 Move the seat as far back down as possi ble E gt Adjust the backrest to an upright position i a Option accessory for more information see Introduction ED Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest and fold it forward 4 Push the seat forward so that the head restraint locks in under the glovebox Raising takes place in reverse order WARNING Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is properly locked after being folded up in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident Power seat G021133 Front edge of seat cushion up down Seat forward backward and up down Backrest rake The power front seats have overload protection which is tripped if a s
11. EN 04 Comfort and driving pleasure RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system Dual Screen Connecting the RSE AUX input 04 G030382 The RSE AUX input is located under the front arm rest 1 Connect the video cable to the yellow socket 2 Connect the left hand audio cable to the white socket and the right hand one to the red socket 3 Connect the power cable to the power socket if your equipment is designed for 12 V For electrical socket location see page 204 System Formats supported by the system Audio CD DA DVD Audio Playback format MP3 WMA Video DVD video VCD SVCD DivX format MPEG 4 WMA video Photo CD Kodak Photo CD JPG Disc DVD RAM DVD ROM DVD RW format DVD RW DVD R DVD R CD R CD ROM CD RW CD 3 HDCD Advanced system settings These settings can only be accessed when the DVD player is empty Press MEDIA MENU GENERAL SETUP ANGLE MARK CAPTION AUDIO SETUP COMPRESSION DVX R REGISTRATION PREFERENCES IY RE AUDIO SUBTITLE DEFAULTS 164 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Changing the battery in the remote control and wireless headphones The remote control and headphones are pow ered by 2 AAA batteries Take along extra batteries for a long journey 1 Unscrew the screw and detach the battery cover 2 Remove the used batteries turn the new batteries in accordance with the symbols in the battery compartment and insert
12. NOTE All timer programming will be cleared if the car s clock is reset 04 Comfort and driving pleasure General information about the Passenger compartment heater additional heater etl ane ee If the additional heater is supplemented with In cold climate zones an additional heater may CET timer function then it can be used as a fuel be required to obtain the correct operating SR aD j Mon driven passenger compartment heater see temperature in the engine and to obtain suffi An page 144 cient heating in the passenger compartment 0 Electric additional heater b 0100 Fuel driven additional heater i to empty tank Y Cars with certain petrol engines have an elec A fuel driven additional heater is fitted in cars tric additional heater integrated into the car s with diesel engines climate control system 04 In a semi cold climate zone diesel driven cars have an electric additional heater instead of a fuel driven version The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running The heater is switched off automatically when a Thumbwheel the correct temperature is reached or when the The heater cannot be controlled manually but engine is switched off RESET button is instead activated automatically after the 1 Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional amp 7gine has been started in outside tempera tures below 14 C and is switched off after
13. gt gt 177 EN 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 178 G021414 The ACC cannot see small vehicles Dark triangle ACC field of vision 1 Sometimes the radar sensor cannot detect vehicles at close distances e g a vehicle that drives in between the car and vehicles in front 2 Small vehicles such as motorcycles or vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected In bends the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Radar blocked See manual this means that the radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked and that vehicles in front of the car could not be detected In turn this means that the Adaptive Cruise Control Distance Alert and Collision Warning with Auto Brake functions are not operating either The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Adaptive cruise control CA E The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt ice and snow Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals No action Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig No action So
14. 04 gt gt 137 EN 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 138 Climate control quickly air the car during hot weather see page 56 Passenger compartment filter All air entering the car s passenger compart ment is cleaned with a filter This must be replaced at regular intervals Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment it may be necessary to replace the filter more often There are different types of passenger com partment filter Make sure that the correct filter is fitted Clean Zone Interior Package CZIP This option keeps the passenger compartment clear of allergy and asthma inducing sub stances For more information on CZIP see the brochure included with the purchase of the car The following is included e An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is opened with the remote control key The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air The function starts when required and is dis engaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened The amount of time the fan runs is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old e The air quality system IAQS is a fully auto matic system that cleans the air in the pas senger compartment from contaminants such as particles hydrocarbons nitrous oxides and ground
15. 145 6000 145 6000 231 4800 203 6000 231 4800 245 6200 300 5600 136 4000 163 3000 205 4000 Torque Nm Swept vol Compres rpm ume litres sion ratio 190 4500 4 87 83 0 1 999 10 8 1 190 4500 4 87 83 0 1 999 10 8 1 340 1700 4800 5 83 93 2 2 521 9 0 1 300 1750 4000 4 88 83 1 1 999 10 0 1 340 1700 4800 5 83 93 2 2 521 9 0 1 320 3200 6 84 96 0 3 192 10 8 1 400 1500 4800 6 82 93 2 2 953 9 3 1 320 2000 4 85 88 0 1 997 18 5 1 400 1400 2850 5 81 77 0 1 984 16 51 420 1500 3250 5 81 93 2 2 400 Groat 3 2 B6324S5 08 T6 B6304T4 D3 D5204T2 179 6400 224 5600 120 3000 243 6400 304 5600 163 3000 Torque Nm Swept vol Compres rpm ume litres sion ratio 320 3200 6 84 96 0 3 192 10 8 1 440 2100 4200 6 82 93 2 2 953 9 3 1 400 1400 2850 5 81 17 0 1 984 16 51 01 10 00 11 08 Specifications Engine specifications XC70 Torque Nm Swept vol Compres Model rpm ume litres sion ratio D5 D5244T10 151 4000 205 4000 420 1500 3250 5 81 93 2 2 400 16 5 1 2 4D D5244T164 120 4000 163 4000 420 1750 3000 5 81 93 2 2 400 16 541 A Certain markets 08 01 10 00 111 08 08 Specifications Adverse driving conditions Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor mally high oil temperature or oil consumption Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions Check the oil level more frequently for long journeys e towing a caravan or trailer e in mountainous regions e at high s
16. 235 50 R 18 235 45 R 19 Temporary Spare Tyre max 80 420 420 420 420 A Economical driving B In certain countries there is the bar unit beside the Sl unit Pascal 1 bar 100 kPa 08 01 10 00 11 08 Specifications Electrical system Electrical system The battery capacity is dependent upon the O IMPORTANT The car has a voltage regulated AC alternator equipment level in the vehicle REE The electrical system is single pole and uses Y R AE i battery of the same cold start capacity and the chassis and engine casing as a conductor reserve capacity as the original see the decal on the battery Battery Voltage V Cold start capacity Reserve capacity CCA Cold Cranking Amperes A minutes 12 520 800 100 160 12 520 700 100 135 12 700 800 135 160 08 08 Specifications 011 10 00 111 Type approval Remote control system CCS J OO OO OO A By CY CZ DDK C E EST F FIN GB Delphi hereby GR H l IRL L LT certifies that this LV M NL P PL S remote control key SK SLO system conforms to IS LI N CH the essential char acteristic require HR ments and other rel evant regulations of directive 1999 5 EC ROK Delphi 2003 07 15 Germany R LPD1 03 0151 BR TENI emnin LL LIDIL HI TE RTS TC E RC CCABO6LP1940T4 08 Symbols in the display General There are a variety of different symbols in the display in the car The symbols are divided into warning indicat
17. Fault indicator If the information symbol illuminates with constant glow and the informa tion display shows Park assist syst Service required then parking assistance is disen gaged A Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 197 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 198 Park assist syst IMPORTANT In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig nals that are caused by external audio sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre quencies that the system works with Examples of such sources include horns wet tyres on asphalt pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc G018067 Cleaning the sensors Sensor location rear The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly Clean them with water and car shampoo Dirt ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals G018129 Sensor location front i i 1 A Option accessory for more information see Introduction General information on BLIS BLIS camera Indicator lamp 6 BLIS symbol BLIS is an information system based on cam era technology that under certain conditions can help the driver to notice vehicles moving in the same direction as the host vehicle in the so called blind spot BLIS WARNING The system is a supplement to no
18. 8 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 181 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Distance Alert The number of lines for the selected time interval is shown during the setting itself and for several seconds after wards Then a smaller scale version of the symbol is shown to the right of the dis play The same symbol is also shown when adaptive cruise control is activated 04 The higher the speed the longer the calcu lated distance in metres for a specific time interval The set time interval is also used by the adaptive cruise control function see page 175 Only use the time interval that is allowed in accordance with local traffic regulations Symbols and messages in the display Limitations The function uses the same radar sensor as adaptive cruise control and the collision warn ing system For more information on the radar sensor and its limitations see page 177 Set time interval after adjustment 182 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Strong sunlight reflections or strong varia tions in light intensity as well as wearing sunglasses could mean that the warning light in the windscreen cannot be seen Poor weather or winding roads could affect the radar sensor s capacity to detect vehi cles in front The size of other vehicles could also affect detection capacity e
19. HSA The HSA Hill Start Assist function means that the pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the foot is moved from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal before setting off or reversing uphill The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver acceler ates To bear in mind The transmission s double clutch has overload protection that is activated if it becomes too hot e g if the car is held stationary with the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a long time Overheated transmission causes the car to shake and vibrate and the warning symbol illu minates and the information display shows a message The transmission can also overheat during slow driving in queues 10 km h or slower on an uphill gradient or with a trailer hitched The transmission cools down when the car is stationary with foot brake depressed and the engine running at idling speed Overheating during slow driving in queues can be avoided by driving in stages Stop the car and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until there is a moderate distance to the traffic ahead drive forward a short distance and then wait another moment with your foot on the brake pedal IMPORTANT Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary on an uphill gradient do not hold the car with the accelerator pedal The gearbox could then overheat Text message and action In some situations the display ma
20. Keyless drive 02 gt gt 53 02 Locks and alarm 02 54 Keyless drive Locking G042792 Cars with the keyless system have a button on the outside door handles Lock the doors and the tailgate by pressing the lock button on one of the door handles on the outside All doors and the tailgate must be closed before the car can be locked otherwise the car is not locked On cars with automatic transmission the gear selector must be set in the P position otherwise the car cannot be locked or the alarm armed 2 Only in combination with power driver s seat and power mirrors Unlocking Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a door handle or the tailgate s rubberised pres sure plate is actuated open the door or tail gate as normal Unlocking with the key blade G042793 If central locking cannot be activated with the PCC e g if the batteries are discharged then the driver s door can be opened with the PCC s detachable key blade see page 47 To access the lock cylinder the door handle s plastic cover must be detached 1 Press the key blade approx 1 cm straight up into the hole on the underside of the door handle cover do not prize i a Option accessory for more information see Introduction gt The plastic cover is prized loose auto matically by the torque when the blade is pushed straight up and into the open ing 2 Insert the key blade in the lock c
21. VOLVO V70 8 XC70 OWNERS MANUAL Web Edition Volvo for life DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo In order to increase your enjoyment of the car we recommend that The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your you familiarise yourself with the equipment instructions and mainte passengers Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world Your Volvo nance information contained in this owner s manual has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements Gb Table of contents 01 Safety Seatbelts PAN o aree sey E ou 16 ArDIGS TA a ae ene eee tee 19 Activating deactivating the airbag 22 Side airbags SIPS bags 24 miarabeCurtain IC SS S 26 WELLES a AA 27 When the systems deploy om 29 Sale nimode A MUNEN 30 Sii aroty B S Oil 4 E Option accessory for more information see Introduction AA O AS A O 00 Introduction Important information aaa Volvo and the environment o 02 Locks and alarm Remote control key key blade 44 PrVacyloekind sr scene een 49 Battery replacement remote control key RO ea N 51 ey ccs A A 99 seNO unlocking 12 56 ChieSafety BEls AA 61 AA E 62 Table of c
22. i ommends that you For more information on the information dis ume contactan od play and READ see page 134 Heater The heater has ised Volvo work 2 stopped been stopped by shop Symbols and display messages a Low bat the cars electron When one of the timer s settings or n A o ee A display text clears automatically after a time Direct start is activated the infor te LAS or after one press on the indicator stalk mation symbol in the combined instrument ie uae READ button panel illuminates while the information display shows an explanatory text and a further illumi nated symbol The table shows symbols and display texts that appear gt gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 145 EN 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 146 Fuel driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater Direct start and immediate stop 1 Scroll with the thumbwheel to Direct start Park heat 2 Press RESET to select between ON and OFF ON Parking heater switched on manually or with programmed timer OFF Parking heater switched off With the direct start of the heater it will be acti vated for 50 minutes Heating of the passenger compartment will begin as soon as the engine coolant has reached the correct temperature NOTE The car can be started and driven while the parking heater is running Setting the timer The time when the car shall be used and heated is specified with th
23. Cal WAS Mereen a 282 Catalytic converter 220 Ci nn 237 Centre console 130 CHASSIS SIN sms 170 Checking and topping up the coolant 260 Crta dedos 31 child safety locks 38 child seats and side airbags 24 location in the car 31 a on PP 31 Child safety locks 61 CHIC SSL ons mt 31 Child Seats none ini 31 integrated two stage booster cushion 36 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats 38 recommended 33 size classes for child seats with the ISO FIX fixture system 38 upper mounting points for child seats 40 Cigarette lighter socket 203 09 Alphabetical Index a z 09 D 09 Alphabetical Index 09 Cleaning automatic Car washes 282 CAP SE adas oe 282 AAE PP 283 SS OPE COMEN 284 eye 1 y AAA nn 284 Clean Zone Interior Package CZIP 138 Climate COM Ob sinon 137 general RAR o e 137 SENSO eE o ee ee 137 Clock SEUNG assusnaio doo 13 CO emissions sans ira 304 GIN SOM nsc 30 Collision warning 184 Collision warning system radar SENSOF nee 177 184 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 184 Colour code PAI usen crea 285 Combined instrument panel 134 Comfort inside the passenger compart on yA 202 COMPSSS nl din 100 CAB PATIO nn 100 setting the zone 100 Condensation in headlamps 282 Controls centre CONSOlO c
24. E1 03301146 Rear facing child seat Child Seat Rear facing child seat Child Seat Rear facing child seat Child Seat rear facing child seat secured withthe rear facing child seat secured withthe rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Use a pro car s seatbelt and straps car s seatbelt and straps tective cushion between the child seat i e aa Type approval E5 03135 Type approval E5 03135 Type approval E5 03135 Child seats which are universally Child seats which are universally Child seats which are universally approved approved approved 2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer s enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement gt gt a 9 01 Safety 01 Child safety Group 1 Volvo rear facing turnable child seat 9 18 kg Volvo Convertible Child Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 04192 Rear facing child seat Child Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Use a pro tective cushion between the child seat and the dashboard Type approval E5 03135 Britax Fixway rear facing child seat secured with the ISOFIX fixture system and straps Type approval E5 03171 Child seats which are universally approved bag Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible C
25. Menus and messages 04 gt gt O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 134 Menus and messages Combined instrument panel GS A MR i INFO RESET l P 01010 tn to empty tank 4 A z LES rr aan of a Information display and controls for menus 1 READ access to message list and mes sage confirmation 2 Thumbwheel browse between menu options RESET reset the active function Used in certain cases to select activate a function see the explanation under each respective function The menus shown on the information displays in the combined instrument panel are con trolled with the left hand stalk switch The menus shown depend on key position see page 74 If a message appears then this must 12Only certain markets 13Can only be set when the engine is switched off be acknowledged with READ for the menus to be shown Menu overview Some ofthe following menu options require the function and hardware to be installed in the car To empty fuel tank Average Instantaneous Average speed DSTC Current speed Tyre pressure Calibration Park heat timer 1 21 Park vent timer 1 2 Park timer mode Direct start Park heat Direct start Park el heat Direct start Park vent Additional heat auto Rest heat start Option accessory for more information see Introduction Message End WU LL E E Y A e F we Le ph a E CIE Time for regular SE
26. Select DAB band 6 4 1 Band Ill 6 4 2 LBand 6 4 3 LBand amp Band II 6 5 Reset DAB 04 Comfort and driving pleasure RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system Dual Screen General TV overview System settings TV The RSE system can be used at the same time l 7 as the car s infotainment system PIPS ASS CCE IA Audio mode TV MEDIA MENU i When the rear seat passengers are using DVD Factory default RSE AUX or watching TV while listening with headphones the driver and front seat passen Channel lock list Time zone setting ger can still use the car s radio or CD player 1 CI module No CAM inserted ee i i CI module infor Power consumption ignition positions ator The system can be activated in ignition position Channel manage lor Il and while the engine is running When the ment Signal strength 04 car is being started the film stops temporarily and continues when the engine has started ANS J When the system has been used once without ignition i tionliti Channel search Management of e yaa ba a K new carriers System settings TV J Add carrier Press MEDIA MENU System settings gt TV Information on fre In the event of extended use more than 10 quency Languages E g English minutes with the engine switched off the capacity of the car s battery may decrease Delete a frequency TV menu language to such a low level that the engine cannot Delete all frequen be started re Pic
27. The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch or five minutes after the engine has been switched off IMPORTANT The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash Deac tivate the rain sensor while the car is running or the remote control key is in position I or Il The symbol in the combined instrument panel and the lamp in the button go out Washing the headlamps and windows a PeF t G019401 Washing function Washing the windscreen Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps and the headlamps are washed once the stalk switch has been released Heated washer nozzles The washer nozzles are heated automatically in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid freezing solid High pressure headlamp washing High pressure headlamp washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid To save fluid the headlamps are washed automatically at every fifth windscreen wash cycle Wiper and washer rear window ap Rear window wiper intermittent wiping Rear window wiper continuous speed Press the stalk switch forward see the arrow in the illustration above to initiate rear window washing and wiping The rear window wiper is equipped with overheating protection which means that the motor is switched off if it overh
28. Windscreen wipers Parking heater Ventilation fan ABS pump ABS valves 60 60 60 100 20 30 25 40 40 20 6 amp 40 Headlamp levelling Xenon Active Xenon Primary fuse CEM ABS 15 feed Speed related power steering Engine Control Module ECM transm SRS Heated washer nozzles Vacuum pump 5 cyl Petrol Turbo and GTDI Electro hydraulic power steering 1 6 DRIVe Lighting panel Relay engine compart ment box 20 10 10 9 9 9 66 8 Auxiliary lamps Horn Engine Control Module ECM Control module auto matic gearbox Compressor A C Relay coils Starter motor relay Ignition coils 4 cyl petrol Glow control module Ignition coils 5 6 cyl pet rol EGR TCV 2 0D HP Fuel pump 1 6D 15 10 Is 15 30 10 20 10 Engine control module Throttle petrol Engine control module 15 Throttle diesel 15 Injection system 4 5 6 cyl petrol Mass air flow sensor 5 6 cyl petrol ECM 6 cyl Mass air flow sensor valves 5 cyl diesel Mass air flow sensor engine control module throttle 1 6D Mass air flow sensor 1s 2 0D Engine valves 10 EVAP Lambda sond 15 Injection petrol Lambda sond 4 cyl pet 10 rol 5 cyl diesel Vacuum pump crankcase valve 5 cyl turbo 2 0 GTDI Diesel filter heater Crankcase ventilation heater 5 cyl diesel Glow plugs
29. camera is dirty or covered with ice or snow Thick fog heavy rain or snow means that the camera does not work sufficiently well The windscreen sur face in front of the camera has been cleaned but the message remains Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera Clean the wind screen surface in front of the camera from dirt ice and snow No action At times the camera does not work during heavy rain or snowfall Wait It may take several minutes for the camera to meas ure the visibility Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the camera cover cleaned an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended F i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Collision Warning with Auto Brake couse Action 04 gt gt 187 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 188 Collision Warning with Auto Brake Symbols and messages in the display Collis n warning OFF Collision warn Unavailable Auto braking was acti vated Windscreen Sensors blocked Collision warning system switched off Shown when the engine is started The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button The collision warning system cannot be activated Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ but
30. from a dangerous position not further than 10 km and not faster than 10 km h Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling for ward e Inthe event of moving a longer distance than 10 km the car must be transported with the drive wheels raised from the road professional recovery is recom mended 05 Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake Jump starting Do not tow the car to bump start the engine Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged and the engine does not start see page 111 IMPORTANT Bump starting the car can damage the cat alytic converter gt gt 05 During your journey Towing and recovery Towing eye e Open the variant with a recess using a The towing eye is screwed into a threaded coin or similar inserted in the recess socket behind a cover on the right hand side turning it outwards Then turn out the of the bumper front or rear cover completely and remove it e The second variant has a marking along one side or in a corner Press the mark ing with a finger and fold out the oppo site side corner at the same time using a coin or similar the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange Turn in the towing eye firmly e g using the wheel wrench G042476 After use unscrew the towing eye and 05 return it to its place Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper
31. the outside with the remote control key or from inside with central locking see pages 45 and 56 Resetting If the battery is disconnected then the function for automatic opening must be reset so that it can work correctly 1 Gently raise the front section of the button to raise the window to its end position and hold it there for one second Release the button briefly Raise the front section of the button again for one second Resetting must be carried out to ensure that pinch protection works Windows rearview and door mirrors Door mirrors Door mirror controls Adjusting 1 Press the L button for the left hand door mirror or the R button for the right hand door mirror The light in the button illumi nates 2 Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre 3 Press the L or R button again The light should no longer be illuminated WARNING The mirrors are the wide angle type for opti mum surveillance Objects may appear fur ther away than they actually are 1 Only in combination with power seat with memory see page 77 Retractable power door mirrors The mirrors can be retracted for parking driving in narrow spaces 1 Press the buttons L and R simultaneously the remote control key must be at least in key position I 2 Release them after approximately 1 second The mirrors auto matically stop in the fully retracted posi tion Fold out the mirrors by pressing down th
32. vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt 1 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch up pen Touching up minor paintwork damage Paint is an important part of the car s rust proofing and should therefore be checked reg ularly To avoid the onset of rust damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips scratches and marks on the edges of wings and doors Materials e primer in a can e spray can or touch up pen e masking tape Colour code VOLVO CAR CORPORATION m Q t o t o ap Car colour code 07 Maintenance and service Car care 07 gt gt 07 Maintenance and service 07 286 Car care It is important that the correct colour is used 4 After a few days polish the touched up For product decal location see page 290 areas Use a soft rag and a small amount 7 of lapping paste Repairing stone chips If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare metal and there is an undamaged col our coat you can paint straight after clean ing the damaged surface Before work is begun the car must be clean and dry and at a temperature above 15 C 1 Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint 2 Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush or a matchstick Apply paint using a brush once the primer is dry 3 For scratches
33. 2 Under the glovebox of the same colour and amperage Cagoates WARNING O Engine compartment Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when 07 replacing a fuse This could cause signifi cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire 07 Maintenance and service Engine compartment 07 Maintenance and service 07 276 General fuses engine compartment On the inside of the cover are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fit ting of fuses Positions see preceding illustration Engine compartment upper B Engine compartment front Engine compartment lower These fuses are all located in the engine com partment box Fuses in 9 are located under e Fuses 1 7 and 42 44 are of the Midi Fuse type and must only be replaced by a work shop Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop e 8 15 and 34 are of the JCASE type and the recommendation for changing is that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop e 16 33 and 35 41 are of the MiniFuse type Fuse box locations in a left hand drive car Ina right hand drive car the fuse box under the glo vebox changes sides 696660600060 OOOO i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Primary fuse CEM KL30B Primary fuse CEM KL30A Primary fuse RIBA KL30 Primary fuse CJB KL30 Primary fuse CJB 15E KL30 PTC Air preheater Headlamp washers
34. 4 cyl diesel Glow plugs 5 cyl diesel Cooling fan 4 5 cyl pet rol Cooling fan 6 cyl petrol 5 cyl diesel Electro hydraulic power steering 1 6D Electro hydraulic power steering other 20 60 70 60 80 80 100 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 07 Maintenance and service 07 gt gt 2 1 E 07 Maintenance and service Under the glovebox pepa opda ee E EME COLA ea A Primary fuse control 40 module audio ja 5 07 Bass speaker 12V socket cargo area 15 z Control panel driver s 20 door Control panel front pas 20 z y senger door e Positions Boz Bo E a A Control panel rear pas senger door right Control panel rear pas senger door left Keyless Power seat driver s side G042562 20 20 20 PAT Option accessory for more information see Introduction ue gt e x 14 B 6 7 18 19 20 21 Y Power seat passenger side Folding head restraint Radio Display RTI Infotainment system Telephone Bluetooth Sun roof interior lighting roof climate sensor Cigarette lighter Rear Seat Entertainment RSE Seat heating passenger side Seat heating driver s side 20 15 10 15 16 15 15 Seat heating rear passen ger side right Seat heating rear passen ger side left P
35. 5 07 Maintenance and service Wiper blades Service position In order to change clean or lift the wiper blades for scraping off ice from the windscreen they must be in service position 1 Turn the remote control key to key position 0 see page 74 and keep the remote con trol key in the ignition switch 2 Move the right hand stalk switch up for about 1 second The wipers then move to standing straight up The wipers return to the starting position when the car is started Replacing the wiper blades G021760 G021762 Wiper blades and washer fluid Lift up the wiper arm Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm Slide in the new wiper blade until a click is heard Check that the blade is firmly installed The wiper blades are different lengths The blade on the driver s side is longer than the blade on the passenger side 07 gt gt 269 07 Maintenance and service Wiper blades and washer fluid Replacing the wiper blades rear window Y IMPORTANT Check the wiper blades regularly Neglected maintenance shortens the serv ice life of the wiper blades o N N A a o 1 Fold out the wiper arm 2 Grip the inner section of the blade by the arrow 3 Turn anticlockwise to use the blade s end position against the wiper arm as a lever to detach the blade more easily The winds
36. 95 COMPASS am ea ee een en on D di eos 100 Power SUN OOP nec semences rennes 101 RS DE ne aeea aani 103 Starting the eggine nem A iia aiii adi 107 Starting the CAMERA oi atada is 109 Starting the engine external battery 111 Ge al OT LE Sh ecco esccsevececevcesdeceanseccudsencadtsdauaneatesoceeessetencssevarens 112 All Whg SS cc eesteecoc see ccsenseccsseesccneesccenseccsnescoosenscoess 117 FOOD ARE SMart Mag sivocseccesedseetdeeecocadsecaeateerecmecdesnecs 118 ile MeSSCerneGOntrol IC Jm asia 120 Parking Drake Sian trea a A 122 y HomeLinkS AMAS 06 a AA 125 3 64 Option accessory for more information see Introduction YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT D 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls Left hand drive ley Instruments and controls ME Page 8 OOO SON Menus and messages direction indicators main dipped beam trip computer Cruise control Horn airbags Combined instrument panel Menu audio and phone control Ignition switch Start stop button Hazard warning flashers Door handle Control panel Menu control and audio system Climate control ECC 62 85 134 166 IIS 20 81 69 73 130 148 205 74 107 85 56 61 9597 130 149 139 03 Your driving environment CD e SAK 0060 0 Gear selector Controls for active chas sis Four C Wipers and washing Steering wheel adjust ment Parking brake Bonne
37. Alcolock on page 103 After a completed period of driving the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test 1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended To bear in mind Before the breath test In order to obtain correct function and as accu rate a measurement result as possible e Avoid eating or drinking approx 5 minutes before the breath test e Avoid excess windscreen washing the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result Change of driver In order to ensure that a new breath test is car ried out in the event of a change of driver depress the switch 2 and the send button 3 simultaneously for approx 3 seconds At which point the car returns to start inhibition mode and a new approved breath test is required before starting the engine Calibration and service The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated at a workshop every 12 months 30 days before recalibration is necessary the display shows Alcoguard Calibr required If calibration is not carried out within these 30 days then normal engine starting will be blocked only starting with the Bypass func i a Option accessory for more information see Introduction tion will then be possible see page 105 sec tion Emergency situation The message can be cleared by pressing the send button 3 once Otherwise it goes out on its own after approx 2 minutes but then reap pears each time
38. Comfort and driving pleasure Driver Alert Select the On option In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tired 04 Pr The function is activated when speed ness stop the car in a safe manner as soon exceeds 65 km h and remains active as possible and rest as long as the speed is over Studies have shown that it is equally as dan 60 km h gerous to drive while tired as it is under the influence of alcohol The display shows a level mark with 1 5 bars where a low number of bars indicates incon sistent driving style A high number of bars indicates stable driving Driver Alert OFF Function not switched on Driver Alert Unavailable The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged Read about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 187 gt gt X Option accessory for more information see Introduction 191 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Driver Alert System DAC Driver Alert Driver Alert Time for a break Windscreen Sensors on blocked Driver Alert Sys Service required The function analyses the driver s driving style The number of bars can vary in the range 1 5 where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent driving ability A high number of bars indicates stable driving The vehicle has been driven inconsistently the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal text The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged Shown in t
39. Inflatable Curtain IC In a side impact accident Whiplash protection In a rear end colli WHIPS sion If the airbags have deployed the following is recommended e Recovering the car Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised TT 01 Safety Safety mode Driving after a collision A re pA A o o If the car is involved in a collision the text Safety mode See manual may appear on the information display This means that the car has reduced functionality Safety mode is a protective state that is enforced when the col lision may have damaged any of the car s vital functions such as the fuel lines sensors for one of the safety systems or the brake system Attempting to start the car First check that no fuel is leaking from the car There must be no smell of fuel either If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage you may attempt to start the car Remove the remote control key and open the driver s door If a message is now shown to the ee effect that the ignition is on press the start button Then close the door and reinsert the remote control key The car s electronics will now try to reset themselves to normal mode Then try to start the car If the message Safety mode See manual is still shown on the display then the car must not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery serv ice used instead Even if the car appears to be d
40. Introduction 02 d 02 Locks and alarm Locking unlocking Power operated tailgate 02 G017876 IMPORTANT Pay attention to the height of the roof when using power operation Do not use power tailgate operation with low roof heights see under the heading Interrupt opening clos ing the tailgate If the system has been operating con tinuously for more than 60 seconds then it is switched off to avoid overloading It can be used again after about 10 minutes If the battery has been discharged or disconnected then the cover must be opened and closed manually once in order to reset the system Snow and wind If the tailgate is forced down by something just when it is being opened e g snow ice or strong wind and this causes the tailgate to lower then it is closed automatically Pinch protection If something with sufficient resistance prevents the tailgate from opening closing then the pinch protection is activated e During opening power tailgate operation is deactivated and the tailgate is disen gaged e During closing the tailgate returns to the fully open position 58 Option accessory for more information see Introduction WARNING Pay attention to the risk of crushing when opening closing Before starting to open close make sure that there is nobody close to the tailgate as a crushing injury could have serious consequences Always operate the tailgate
41. Keyless drive function Release manually by pressing the START STOP ENGINE button then depress the brake or clutch pedal and pull the control Symbols P Read the message on the infor mation display A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen Read the mes sage on the information display 03 Your driving environment D Parking brake 03 gt gt D 03 Your driving environment Parking brake 03 Messages Parkeringsbroms Serv erfodras Park brake not fully released A fault is pre venting the parking brake from being released Visit a workshop an authorised Volvo work shop is recommended A warning signal sounds if you pull away with this error mes sage Parking brake not applied A fault is pre venting the parking brake from being applied Try to apply and release Visit a workshop if the message remains a Volvo workshop is rec ommended The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed with the door open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged Parking brake Service required A fault has arisen Visit a workshop if the fault persists a Volvo workshop is recommended If the car has to be parked before the fault has been rectified then the wheels must be turned as if parking o
42. Safety 01 Child safety WARNING Label Airbag Never place a child in a child seat or on a Booster cushions child seats with steel booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag braces or some other design that could rest SRS is activated on the seatbelt buckle s opening button must not be used as they could cause the No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit seatbelt buckle to open accidentally in the front passenger seat if the airbag SRS is activated Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen Label fitted on the end face of the instrument panel on the passenger side see the illustration on page 2 Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life 32 01 Safety 9 a Recommended child seats bag Group 0 Volvo infant seat Volvo Infant Seat Volvo infant seat Volvo Infant Seat max 10 kg rear facing child seat secured withthe rear facing child seat secured with the ISOFIX fixture system ISOFIX fixture system Group 0 Type approval E5 04301146 Type approval E5 03301146 max 13 kg Volvo infant seat Volvo Infant Seat Volvo infant seat Volvo Infant Seat Volvo infant seat Volvo Infant Seat rear facing child seat secured withthe rear facing child seat secured withthe rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt car s seatbelt car s seatbelt Type approval E1 04301146 Type approval E1 03301146 Type approval
43. The seatbelt then pro vides more effective restraint for the occu pants WARNING Never insert the tongue of the passenger s seatbelt into the buckle on the driver s side Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not func tion as intended in the event of a collision There is a risk of serous injury Airbags The warning symbol in the combined instru ment panel illuminates when the remote con trol key is in key position Il or Ill The symbol clears after approx 6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault free If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv ing it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality The symbol indi cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys tem SIPS the IC system or some other fault in the system Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately As well as the warning symbol a message may appear on the information display in appropri ate cases If the warning symbol malfunctions the warning triangle illuminates and SRS Airbag Service required or SRS Airbag Service urgent appears in the display Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately o o GS G018666 a I Airba
44. about the different key positions for the remote control key see page 74 o e N pa o o Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated see preceding illustration 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 23 S 01 Safety 01 Side airbags SIPS bags D ise re In a side impact collision a large proportion of the collision force is transferred by the SIPS Side Impact Protection System to beams pil lars the floor the roof and other structural parts of the body The side airbags at the driv er s and front passenger seats protect the chest area and the hip and are an important part of the SIPS The SIPS bag system consists of two main components side airbag and sensors The side airbags are located in the front seat backr ests e Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop Defective work in the SIPS bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury e Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel since this area is required by the side airbag e Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags e The side airbag is a supplement to the seatbelts Always use a
45. all braking ceases 03 Your driving environment CD Foot brake Symbols in the combined instrument panel KOJ Constant glow Check the brake fluid level If the level is low fill with brake fluid and 03 check for the cause of the brake fluid loss Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started There was a fault in the brake system s ABS function when the engine was last running WARNING If and illuminate at the same time there may be a fault in the brake sys tem If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor mal at this stage drive carefully to the near est workshop and have the brake system checked an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated D 03 Your driving environment 03 Hill Descent Control HDC General HDC can be compared to an automatic engine brake When you release the accelerator on downhill gradients the car is normally braked by means of the engine striving for low engine idling speeds so called engine braking But the steeper the road and the more load there is in the car the faster the car rolls despite engine braking In order to then reduce speed the driver has to assist using the footbrake The function makes it possible to increase reduce spee
46. and automatically open to the previous posi tion Wind deflector The sunroof has a wind deflector that is folded up when the sunroof is in the open position i i 1 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD Alcoguard General information on the Alcolock 1 Nozzle for breath test The function of the Alcolock is to prevent the 2 Switch diore the Alcalocic mite holder Thewill a from na ae ease under 3 Transmission button keep the built in battery fully charged and InTIuence ot alcohol before the engine can De the Alcolock is activated automatically started the driver must take a breath test that a As when the car is opened verifies that he she is not under the influence 5 Lamp for result of breath test i i i indi A 03 of alcohol Alcolock Eaton takes place in 6 Lamp indicates ready for breath test Before starting the engine accordance with each market s limit value in force for driving legally The Alcolock is activated automatically and is Operation then ready for use when the car is opened WARNING Battery 1 When indicator lamp 6 is green the Alco indi lock is ready for use The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt I OIDER indicator lamp 4 shows battery sta J the driver from responsibility It is always the tus 2 Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder If responsibility of the driver to be sober and de re ioe dl ei Lamp 4 OS with the
47. brake then the cruise control uses the collision warning system s warning lamp and warning Option accessory for more information see Introduction sound see page 184 to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required The warning lamp may be difficult to notice in strong sunlight or when sunglasses are being worn Cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor Consequently there may be no warning or it may be sub ject to a delay Do not wait for a warning but brake when it is necessary Steep roads and or heavy load Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces The cruise control may have dif ficultly in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep roads with a heavy load or with a trailer in which case be extra attentive and ready to slow down Adaptive cruise control Steering wheel keypad and display Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed Cruise control On Off or Standby mode Time interval Increase decrease Activate and adjust the speed Selected speed in brackets Standby mode Time interval On during adjustment Time interval On after adjustment Activating and setting the speed Switch on cruise control with one press on the steering wheel button 1 the symbol is illuminated in the display The brackets 6 at mea
48. built in protection function is activated which amongst other things illuminates the instrument panel s warning symbol and there is a text message displayed there Transmission hot Reduce speed or Transmission hot Stop safely follow the recommendation given and lower the speed and stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for a few minutes to allow the gearbox to cool down e If the car overheats the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily e Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive It is normal for the engine s cooling fan to operate for a while after the engine has been switched off Open tailgate WARNING Do not drive with the tailgate open Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area Do not overload the battery The electrical functions in the car load the bat tery to varying degrees Avoid using the key position Il when the engine is switched off Instead use the mode which uses less power Also be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the engine is switched off Examples of such functions are e ventilation fan e windscreen wiper e audio system high volume e headlamps If the battery voltage is low the information dis play shows the text Low battery Power save mode The energy saving function then shuts down certain function
49. can then be used without the code at all Reset to factory settings The phone settings are fully reset under Phone settings Reset Phone settings Installing the SIM card re A o o Make sure that the phone is deactivated Pull out the SIM card holder which is located in the glovebox Place the SIM card with the metal surface visible Ep and fit the cover on the SIM card holder B Refit the SIM card holder Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 213 214 Recommendations during driving 216 FROTU CIN RP SE cco ccceccieccdasedcaenschdenccusecoarescadencuaendoescoereecdaeessaee 219 FUEL grunt incre nn cs emubartuns queen nee menttasetentieenbsa fre sneentonnte 220 LOGIC A ee EE 224 CAJO ATEN eee re a e 228 Drivi g with MANIERE See en am mere ee 231 Towing and FECOMGRY RM naar oer ear aia a 237 DURING YOUR JOURNEY 05 During your journey Recommendations during driving General Economical driving Driving economically means driving smoothly while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions e Avoid driving with open windows e Do not use winter tyres when the winter season is over e Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration and heavy braking e Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the fuel c
50. clockwise The keyhole is horizontal in the locked position E Pull out the key blade e Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order For information on privacy locking see page 49 Tailgate Unlocking with the remote control key G021093 The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed and the tailgate unlocked on its own by using the remote control key s Pax button If the car is equipped with an alarm the alarm indicator on the instrument panel stops to show that alarm for the whole of the car is not armed The alarm s level and movement sen sors and the sensors for opening the tailgate are disconnected The doors remain locked and armed e The tailgate is unlocked but remains closed press lightly on the rubberised pressure plate under the outer handle and lift the tailgate Locking unlocking If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re armed Unlocking the car from inside G043599 To unlock the tailgate Press the lighting panel button 1 gt The tailgate is unlocked and can be opened within 2 minutes if the car is locked from the inside Locking with the remote control key Press the remote control key s button for locking Tall see page 45 gt If the car is equipped with an alarm the alarm indicator on the instrument panel starts to flash which means that the alarm is armed g Option accessory for more information see
51. detect the vehi cles This means for example that the system does not react to a trailer without headlamps which is towed behind a car or truck The system does not react to cyclists or moped riders The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to those of the human eye i e they do not see as well e g in heavy snowfall against strong light or in thick fog Cleaning In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam era lenses must be clean The lenses can be cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not scratched IMPORTANT The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice or snow If necessary brush snow away from the lenses Messages on the display Blind spot info The BLIS system is system ON activated Blind spot syst dis engaged contact a workshop Blind spot syst Service required The BLIS camera is blocked by dirt snow or ice clean the lenses Blind spot syst Camera blocked 200 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Blind spot syst Reduced function in Reduced function the data transmis sion between the BLIS system s cam era and the car s electrical system The camera resets itself when the data transmission between the BLIS system s camera and the car s electri cal system returns to normal Blind spot info The BLIS system is system OFF deactivated Repair of the BLIS system components must only be
52. determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced Inflating the tyres The car s original tyres can be inflated by the compressor 1 The compressor must be switched off Make sure that the switch is in position O and locate the cable and air hose 2 Unscrew the wheel s dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bot tom of the thread on the tyre s air valve Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in danger to life Never leave the engine run ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf ficient ventilation 06 Wheels and tyres Emergency puncture repair TMK WARNING Replacing the sealing fluid canister Replace the bottle when the expiration date has passed Treat the old bottle as environ mentally hazardous waste 3 Connect the cable to one of the car s 12 V sockets and start the car WARNING Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running The bottle contains 1 2 Ethanol and natural 4 Start the compressor by flicking the switch rubber latex to position I Harmful if ingested Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact IMPORTANT Risk of overheating The compressor must Avoid contact with the skin and eyes 5 Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table see page 310 Release air using the pres sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high
53. difficult weather conditions Maintenance see page 283 Areas where IR film is not applied Q IMPORTANT O Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice A 47 mm as td coniro j alsa from the windows Use the defroster to G amp D Switch for electric child safety locks and remove ice from the mirrors see B 87 mm disengaging rear power window buttons page 98 see page 61 The windscreen is equipped with a heat Rear window controls reflecting film IR that reduces the solar heat _ radiation into the passenger compartment Front window controls The positioning of electronic equipment such DIAS as a transponder behind a glass surface with AN WARNII heat reflecting film may affect its function and Check that none of the rear seat passengers performance is in danger of becoming trapped in any way For the optimal function of electronic equip pub closing the windows from the driver s ment it should be positioned on the part of the gt gt i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 95 03 Your driving environment 03 96 Operating the power windows Windows rearview and door mirrors Make sure that children or other passengers are not in danger of becoming trapped in any way when closing the windows in par ticular when the remote control key is used If there are children in the car remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by removing the remote control k
54. display text Main beam On 1 For certain engine variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used Warnings are made via display text For information on checking the oil level see page 257 COO Sym Specification bol KI Left hand direction indicators Right hand direction indicators ABL fault The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in the ABL function Active Bending Lights Emissions system If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to a fault in the car s emissions system Drive to a workshop for checking Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working The car s regular brake system con tinues to work but without the ABS function 1 Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine Restart the engine If the symbol remains illuminated drive to a workshop to have the ABS system checked Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop Rear fog lamp on This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is on There is only one fog lamp It is located on the driver s side Stability system A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating If the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in the system Engine preheater diesel This symbol illuminates during engine preheat ing Preheating occurs when the temperature
55. driving environment door is opened the driver s seat and also the door mirrors automatically adopt the positions stored in the key memory oR The seat and the door mirrors do not move if they are already set the relevant position 03 It is also possible to use the key memory by pressing the unlock button on the remote con trol key when the driver s door is open The key memory can be activated deactivated under Car Key memory Seat mirror positions For a description of the menu sys tem see page 130 The key memory in the two remote control keys and the seat s three memories are completely independent of each other Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move press one of the buttons to stop the seat Restarting to reach the seat position stored in the key memory is performed by pressing the unlock button on the remote control key The driver s door must then be open Risk of crushing Make sure that children do not play with the controls Check that there are no objects in front of behind or under the seat during adjustment Ensure that none of the backseat passengers will be trapped Heated ventilated seats For heated ventilated seats see page 140 Head restraint centre seat rear E Adjust the head restraint according to passen ger height so that the whole of the back of the head is covered if possible Slide it up as required To lower the head restraint again th
56. engine does not start try again by hold ing in the START STOP ENGINE button until the engine starts WARNING Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car especially if there are children in the car For information on how the key is removed from the ignition switch see page 74 1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START STOP ENGINE button to start the car The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting This is so that the emissions system can reach normal operating tem perature as quickly as possible which min imises exhaust emissions and protects the environment Keyless drive Follow steps 2 3 for starting petrol and diesel engines For more information on Keyless drive see page 53 One precondition for starting the car is that one ofthe car s remote control keys with the keyless drive function is located inside the passenger compartment or the cargo area WARNING Never remove the remote control key with the Keyless drive function from the car while driving or during towing Stop the engine To switch off the engine Press START STOP ENGINE 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD 03 gt gt 107 D 03 Your driving environment Starting the engine If the car has an automatic gearbox and the gear selector is not in a posi
57. etc in the glove compartment or other com partments Otherwise they may injure peo ple in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision For RSE the USB input is in a different location see page 148 Tunnel console G036441 Storage compartment e g for CD discs input for AUX and USB e g iPod under the armrest 2 Includes cup holder for driver and passen ger as well as 12 V socket and small com partment If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is a cigarette lighter in the 12 V socket and a detachable ashtray in the small compartment Cigarette lighter and ashtray The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached by lifting the tray straight up Activate the lighter by pushing in the button The button pops out when the lighter is hot Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils The owner s manual and maps can be kept here for example There are also holders for pens on the inside of the lid The glovebox can be locked with the key blade see page 47 A n i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure O Comfort inside the passenger compartment 04 203 EN 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 204 Comfort inside the passenger compartment Floor mats 12 V socket the remote control key must be in at least key Volvo supplies specially manufactured floor position I see page
58. example 7Jx16x50 270 km h Q 160 km h used only on winter tyres 7 Rim width in inches Loca index un J Rim flange profile Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load H 210 km h a load index LI The car s weight determines 16 Rim diameter in the load capacity required of the tyres Mini V 240 km h inches mum permitted index is specified in the table W 270 km h see page 308 50 Off set in mm dis Y 300 km h tance from wheel Speed ratings centre to wheel con Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum tact surface against speed a speed rating Speed Symbol SS WARNING 06 une ns Tyre speed class must at least correspond with The car must be fitted with tyres which have the same or a higher load index LI and ote d Mini itted speed GA SLOP Spee Gs NI PM e Pee speed rating SS than specified If a tyre Tyre dimensions rating is specified in the table see page 308 225 50R17 98W with too low a load index or speed rating is The only exception to these conditions is win used it may overheat The dimensions are stated on all car tyres tertyres both those with metal studs and those Example of designation without where a lower speed rating may be used If such a tyre is chosen the car must not 225 Tyre width mm be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre for example class Q can be driven at a 50 Ratio between tyre wall height and maximum of 160 km h tyre width 06 246 Removing S
59. g motorcycles This could mean that the warning lamp illumi nates at a shorter distance than the setting or that the warning is temporarily absent Extremely high speeds can also cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than that set due to limitations in sensor range Set time interval during adjustment 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Distance Alert Radar blocked Distance Alert temporarily disengaged 5 See manual The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles e g in the event that heavy rain or slush has collected in front of the radar sensor Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 177 Collision warn Service Distance Alert and Collision Warning with Auto Brake are fully or partially disengaged required Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 04 gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 183 EN 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 184 Collision Warning with Auto Brake General Collision Warning with Auto Brake Collision Warning with Auto Brake is designed to assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a vehicle in front that is stationary or driving in the same direction The collision warning system has the following three functions e Collision Warning Warns the driver of a potentially imminent collision e Brake Support Assists the driver to b
60. habit to clean the tracks with a vac a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps uum cleaner and a lightly moistened soft cloth gt gt 05 During your journey 05 Moving a cargo retaining hook G017742 Fold the cargo retaining hook down in the direction to which its opening points p Press the hook down lightly and at the same time push it to the required position E Fold the hook up it is self locking ORC There must be at least 50 cm between the cargo retaining hooks in the rail Removing a cargo retaining hook G018134 The cargo retaining hooks can be easily removed from the rail e g for cleaning the bot tom of the rail 13 Fold the cargo retaining hook down in the direction to which its opening points E gt Press the hook down lightly and at the same time slide it to the cut out opening E Lift the hook straight up Securing the hook takes place in reverse order A removed hook must be pressed down lightly at the same time in order to enable its reinsertion into the rail Cargo retaining hook correctly fitted incorrectly fitted co re o o o Fit the cargo retaining hooks correctly It is important that the cargo retaining hooks are fitted correctly The hooks openings must point away from each other WARNING Fit the cargo retaining hooks correctly Oth erwise the cargo retaining strap will move the cargo retaining hook down so that it loosens and the stra
61. handsfree function Volvo recommends that you seek assis tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www volvocars com for information on compatible phones G021444 Centre console control panel VOLUME Same functionality available in steering wheel keypad Number and letter buttons PHONE On off and standby mode Navigation button EXIT End refuse phone calls clear entered characters interrupt current func tion Same functionality available in steer ing wheel keypad ENTER Accept calls A press of the but ton reveals latest dialled numbers Same functionality available in steering wheel keypad Remember The menus are controlled from the centre con sole and the steering wheel keypad For gen eral information on menus see page 130 If the car is equipped with both Bluetooth handsfree and built in phone then there is an additional menu for chang ing the phone in the phone menu see page 131 Activating deactivating A short press on PHONE activates the hands free function The text PHONE at the top of the display shows that it is in phone mode The symbol fa shows that the handsfree func tion is active One long press on PHONE deactivates the handsfree function and disconnects a con nected phone ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure O 04 205 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Bluetooth hands
62. in the plastic cover at each point Crank the foot of the jack down so it is pressed squarely on the ground IMPORTANT The ground must be firm smooth and level 8 Lift the car so that the wheel is free Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel Installation 1 Clean the contact surfaces between wheel and hub Changing wheels 2 Put on the wheel Tighten the wheel bolts thoroughly 3 Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate G043932 4 Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise It is important that the wheel bolts are tight ened properly Tighten to 140 Nm Check the torque with a torque wrench 5 Refit any full hubcaps The hubcap outlet for the valve must be located over the valve on the rim when fit ted O IMPORTANT Never crawl under the car when it is raised Never drive faster than 80 km h with a spare on the jack wheel on the car Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack IMPORTANT Park the car so that passengers have the car or preferably a crash barrier between them and the road The car must never be driven fitted with more than one temporary spare wheel The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel Spare wheel well with the outside down The same bolt runs The spare wheel Temporary spare is only through to secure the spare wheel and the intended for use temporarily and must be foam block The foam block contains all the replaced
63. is locked unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are auto matically retracted extended F i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment O 03 97 D 03 Your driving environment 03 98 Windows rearview and door mirrors The function can be activated deactivated under Car settings gt Side mirror settings gt Fold mirr when locking For a description of the menu system see page 130 Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting extending to work correctly 1 Retract the mirrors with the L and R but tons 2 Fold them out again with the L and R but tons 3 Repeat the above procedure as necessary The mirrors are now reset in neutral position Home safe and approach lighting The light on the door mirrors illuminates when approach lighting or home safe lighting is selected see page 87 Rear window and door mirror defrosters G039557 Use the defroster to quickly remove misting and ice from the rear window and the door mir rors One press of the button starts the heating The light in the button indicates that the function is active Disconnect the heating as soon as the ice misting is cleared in order not to load the battery unnecessarily However the heating is switched off automatically after
64. is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts rubber and trim components such as glossy trim mouldings When using such a cleaning agent the instruc tions must be followed carefully IMPORTANT Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber When using degreasant on plastic and rub ber only rub with light pressure if it is nec essary Use a soft washing sponge Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used Rims Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome plated aluminium rims Polishing and waxing Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old However the car can be waxed during this time Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq uid or solid wax Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully Many preparations con tain both polish and wax IMPORTANT Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be
65. km depending on driving conditions Regeneration normally takes 10 20 minutes It may take a little longer at a low average speed Fuel consumption may increase slightly during regeneration Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in cold weather then the engine does not reach normal operating temperature This means that regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied When the filter has become approximately 80 full of particles a warning triangle on the instrument panel illuminates and the message Soot filter full See manual is shown on the instrument panel display Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating tem perature preferably on a main road or motor i a Option accessory for more information see Introduction way The car should then be driven for approx imately 20 minutes more NOTE A smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily during regeneration When regeneration is complete the warning text is cleared automatically Use the parking heater in cold weather so that the engine reaches normal operating tempera ture more quickly IMPORTANT If the filter fills up with particles then it can be difficult to start the engine and the filter will be incapable of functioning Then there is a risk that the filter will have to be replaced F
66. km h backwards However any speed within the gear s speed register can be selected using the accelerator pedal When the accelerator pedal is released the car is braked quickly to 10 or 7 km h respectively irrespective of the hill s gradient and without the need for the foot brake The brake lights come on automatically when the function is operating The driver can brake or stop the car at any time by using the foot brake HDC is deactivated 03 Your driving environment D Hill Descent Control HDC e with the on off button on the centre con sole e ifa gear higher than 1 is selected on a manual gearbox e ifa gear higher than 1 is selected on an automatic gearbox or if the gear selector is moved to position D 03 The function can be disengaged at any time If it takes place on a steep downhill gradient then the braking effect will not release directly but slowly instead With HDC activated you may experience a delay between acceleration pedal activation and engine response 03 Your driving environment 03 Parking brake Function A faint electric motor noise can be heard when the parking brake is being applied The noise can also be heard during the automatic func tion checking of the parking brake If the car is stationary when the parking brake is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels If it is applied when the car is moving then the normal foot brake is used i e the brake ac
67. level in the brake fluid reservoir see page 261 If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the same time there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system 1 Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine 2 Restart the engine e f both symbols extinguish continue driving e Ifthe symbols remain illuminated check the level in the brake fluid reservoir see page 261 If the brake fluid level is nor mal but the symbols are still illuminated the car can be driven with great care to a workshop to have the brake system checked Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid The loss of brake fluid must be investigated by a workshop Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop WARNING If the brake and ABS symbols are illumi nated at the same time there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking Warning The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and or driveability of the car An explan atory text is shown on the information display at the same time The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the READ but ton see page 134 The warning symbol can 03 Your driving environment CD I
68. level ozone In cars with CZIP the IAQS filter should be changed after 15 000 km or once per year depending on whichever occurs first How ever up to 75 000 km over 5 years In cars without CZIP the IAQS filter must be changed at the normal service Use of tested materials in the interior equipment The materials have been developed in order to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and they contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean The carpets in both the passenger com partment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo see page 283 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Menu settings It is possible to change the default settings for three of the climate control system s functions via the centre console see page 130 e Fan speed in automatic mode see page 141 e Recirculation timer for passenger com partment air see page 142 e Automatic rear window defrosting see page 98 All climate control system functions are set to original position with RESET via the display Air distribution G017699 The incoming air is divided between 20 different vents in the passenger compart ment Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode If necessary it can be controlled manually see page 143 Air vents in the dashboard G021367 EY Open E
69. magazine is emptied disc by disc Pause If the volume is turned down completely the CD player is stopped The player is restarted when volume is increased Audio files The CD player also supports MP3 and WMA format audio files NOTE Some copy protected audio files may not be read by the player When a CD with audio files is inserted into the player the disc s file structure is loaded Depending on the quality of the disc and the quantity of information there may be a delay before playback starts Navigation and playback If a disc containing audio files is inside the CD player then ENTER leads to the disc s direc tory structure The directory structure is navi gated in the same way as the audio system s menu structure Audio files have the symbol and directories have the symbol Maa Start audio file playback with ENTER When the playback of a file is finished the play back of the other files in the same directory i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 153 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Audio system continues Directory change takes place auto matically when all files in the current directory have been played back Fast wind change CD tracks and audio files Short presses P on the navigation but ton are used to scroll between CD tracks audio files Long presses are used to fast wind CD tracks audio files The steering wheel keypad can also be u
70. manual child lock Electrical locking of the rear doors and power windows Control panel driver s door When the electric child safety lock is active then the rear e windows can only be opened with the driv er s door control panel e doors cannot be opened from inside Lh The child safety locks are activated deacti vated in all key positions see page 74 and up to 2 minutes after the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch If a door is opened within this time the function is deactivated Press the button in the driver s door control panel gt The information display shows the mes sage Rear child locks Activated and the button s lamp illuminates when the locks are active F i 1 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm 02 61 02 Locks and alarm Alarm General 02 Activated alarm is triggered if e adoor the bonnet or the tailgate is opened e amovement is detected in the passenger compartment if fitted with a movement detector e the caris raised or towed away if fitted with a tilt detector e the battery s cable is disconnected e the siren is disconnected If there is a fault in the alarm system the infor mation display shows a message In which case contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended The movement sensors trigger an alarm in the event of movement in the passen
71. means system fault 04 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 170 Adapting driving characteristics Active chassis Four C Active chassis Four C Continously Controlled Chassis Concept regulates the characteris tics of the shock absorbers so that the car s driving characteristics can be adjusted There are three settings Comfort Sport and Advanced Comfort This setting means that the car is perceived as being more comfortable on rough and uneven road surfaces Shock absorption is soft and the movement of the body is smooth and gentle Sport This setting means that the car is perceived as being more sporty and is recommended for more active driving Steering response is faster than in the Comfort mode Shock absorption is harder and the body follows the road in order to reduce rolling during cornering Advanced This setting is only recommended on very even and smooth road surfaces The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi mum roadholding and rolling in bends is further minimised Operation For a description of the menu system see z j page 131 This menu cannot be accessed while the car is in motion G021410 f Chassis settings Use the buttons in the centre console to change setting The setting in use when the engine is switched off is activated next time the engine is started Speed related power steering Steering force increases with the speed of the car to give the driver enhanc
72. misting on the insides of the windows by primarily using the defroster function To reduce the risk of misting keep the win dows clean and use window cleaner Temporary shut off of the air conditioning When the engine requires full power e g for full acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer the air conditioning can be temporarily switched off There may then be a temporary increase in temperature in the passenger compartment Condensation In warm weather condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car This is normal Ice and snow Remove ice and snow from the climate control system air intake the grille between the bonnet and the windscreen Fault tracing and repair Engage a workshop that has authorisation for the fault tracing and repair of the climate con trol system Volvo recommends that you con tact an authorised Volvo workshop Refrigerant The climate control system contains the refrig erant R134a see page 302 This refrigerant contains no chlorine which means that it is harmless to the ozone layer Engage a work shop that has authorisation for filling changing refrigerant to carry out the work Volvo recom mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop Total airing function The function opens closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to i i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure
73. not sufficient to hold the car in all situation Disengaging the parking brake PUSH PULL Parking brake control Cars with manual gearbox Releasing manually 1 Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch 2 Depress the brake pedal firmly 3 Pull the control The parking brake can also be released manually by depressing the clutch pedal instead of the brake pedal Volvo recom mends the use of the brake pedal Releasing automatically 1 Start the engine 2 Ease up the clutch and depress the accel erator Cars with automatic gearbox Releasing manually 1 Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch 2 Depress the brake pedal firmly 3 Pull the control Releasing automatically 1 Put the seatbelt on 2 Start the engine 3 Move the gear selector to position D or R and depress the accelerator For safety reasons the parking brake is only released automatically if the engine is run ning and the driver is wearing a seatbelt The parking brake is released immediately on cars with automatic gearbox when the accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear selector is in position D or R Heavy load uphill A heavy load such as a trailer can cause the car to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline Avoid this by depressing the control while driv ing off Release the control when the engine achieves traction Cars with
74. range for locking unlocking and tailgate is about 20 m from the car for other functions up to about 100 m If the car does not verify a button being pressed move closer and try again The information button functions can be disrupted by surrounding radio waves buildings topographical conditions etc Out of PCC range If the PCC is too far away from the car for the information to be read then the status the car was last left in is shown without the light trav elling around on the PCC If several PCCs are used for the car then it is only the PCC last used for locking unlocking that shows correct status Remote control key key blade MH If no indicator lamps illuminate when the information button is used within range then this may be because the last commu nication between the PCC and the car was disrupted by surrounding radio waves buildings topographical conditions etc Detachable key blade A remote control key contains a detachable key blade of metal with which some functions can be activated and some operations carried out The key blade s unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops which are rec ommended when ordering new key blades Key blade functions Using the remote control key s detachable key blade e the driver s door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key see page 54 e the rear doors mechanical child safety locks can be
75. right distance from each design line using the illustration and the dimensions in the following list e LHD Right approx 86 mm 03 e B LHD Left approx 40 mm e C RHD Right 0 mm e D RHD Left approx 96 mm Q 03 Your driving environment Lighting Aligning the templates D o re Le re O Upper row masking left hand drive cars templates A and B Lower row masking right hand drive cars templates C and D 03 Your driving environment D Ps Lighting Templates for halogen headlamps D 03 Your driving environment 03 g2 Wipers and washing Windscreen wipers 1 CJ Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers Rain sensor on off 2 Thumbwheel sensitivity frequency Windscreen wipers off 0 Move the stalk switch to position O to switch off the windscreen wipers Single sweep TN Raise the stalk switch and release to make one sweep Intermittent wiping INT Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when inter mittent wiping is selected Continuous wiping K7 The wipers sweep at normal speed Y Y The wipers sweep at high speed IMPORTANT Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in and that any snow or ice on the wind screen and rear window is scraped away IMPORTANT Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are clean
76. seatbelt Child seats and side airbags The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag A child seat or booster cushion can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an activated passenger air bag 1 For information on activating deactivating the airbag see page 22 COO The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags and sensors A sufficiently violent collision trips 01 Safety 9 01 the sensors and the side airbags are inflated The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision S 01 Safety 01 Inflatable Curtain IC Properties Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof The hook is only designed for light clothing not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example Do not screw or install anything onto the car s headlining door pillars or side panels This could compromise the intended pro tection Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas ie N o N p o 0 The inflatable curtain IC Inflatable Curtain is a Do not load the car higherthan 50 mm under part of SIPS and the airbags It is fitted in the the top edge of t
77. see page 249 WARNING You should not drive faster than 80 km h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre maximum driving distance is 200 km The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Overview G032824 Label maximum permitted speed Switch 6 Cable Bottle holder orange cap Protective cap Pressure reducing valve Air hose Sealing fluid bottle Pressure gauge Emergency puncture repair TMK The sealing fluid can irritate the skin In the Do not leave children in the car without case of contact with skin wash away the supervision when the engine is running fluid with soap and water 8 Flick the switch to position I 3 Check that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and the air hose T Never stand next to the tyre when the com pressor is running If cracks or unevenness Do not break the bottle s seal before use arise then the compressor must be The seal is broken automatically when the switched off immediately The journey bottle is screwed in should not be continued Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended 4 Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the bottle s stopper 5 Screw the bottle into its holder When the compressor star
78. see pages 257 and 258 Low oil pressure If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine s oil pressure is too low Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level top up if necessary If the symbol illumi nates and the oil level is normal contact a workshop Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work shop Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake is applied The symbol flashes during application and then changes over to a constant glow A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen Read the message on the information display Airbags SRS If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving it means a fault has been detected in the seatbelt buckle SRS SIPS or IC systems Drive immediately to a workshop to have the system checked Volvo recom mends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop Seatbelt reminder This symbol illuminates if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt Alternator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system Visit a workshop Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work shop Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates the brake fluid level may be too low Stop the car in a safe place and check the
79. table on page 248 e Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump tion seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer See further information and more advice on pages 12 and 216 See page 220 for general information on fuel 08 Specifications 01 10 00 11 1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment EU driving cycles all in accordance with EU Directive 80 1268 EEC Euro 4 EU Regulation 08 no 682 2008 Euro 5 and UN ECE Regulation no 101 The regulations cover the driving cycles for city driving and driving on main roads City driving the measurement starts with cold starting the engine The driving is simulated Driving on main roads the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 120 km h The driving is simulated The V70 with the D5 engine and 6 speed manual transmission is started in 2nd gear under normal conditions The value for combined driving which is reported in the table is a combination of city driving and driving on main roads in accordance with legal requirements CO emissions the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles These are then analysed and give the value for CO emissions 307 0110 OO 11 08 Specifications Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure Approved dimensions shows all approved combinations of wheel drive AWD and the type of tra
80. the number of kilometres driven num ber of months since the last service engine run ning time and oil grade If the service intervals are not followed then the warranty does not cover any damaged parts Volvo recom mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for service Transmission oil Change nee ded Transmission performance low Transmission hot Reduce speed Transmission hot Stop safely Specification Volvo recommends that you engage an author ised Volvo workshop to check the car as soon as possible The gearbox cannot handle full capacity Drive carefully until the message clears If shown repeatedly Volvo recommends that you contact an author ised Volvo workshop Drive more smoothly or stop the car in a safe manner Disengage the gear and run the engine at idling speed until the message clears Critical fault Stop the car immediately in a safe manner Volvo rec ommends that you con tact an authorised Volvo workshopbB 04 gt gt O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Menus and messages Temporarily A function has been OFF temporarily switched off and is reset auto matically while driving or after starting again Low battery The audio system is Power save switched off to save mode energy Charge the bat 04 tery A Part of message shown together with information on where the problem has arisen B For more messages concerning automatic trans
81. the parking brake Release the foot brake and start driving off Towing bracket If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar the installation instructions for the loose sec tion must be followed carefully see page 234 If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar e Follow the installation instructions care fully e The detachable section must be locked with the key before setting off e Check that the indicator window shows green Important checks e The towbar s towball must be cleaned and greased regularly If a towball hitch with vibration damper is used it is not necessary to grease the tow ball 05 During your journey Driving with a trailer Storing the detachable towba Specifications a Y G017971 G021485 Towbar storage space Dimensions mounting points mm IMPORTANT db ies 05 Always remove the towbar after use and A XC70 1113 store it in the appointed location in the car firmly fastened with its strap B V70 93 B XC70 i C 855 D 428 l E 112 F 346 G Side member H Ball centre 05 During your journey Driving with a trailer Attaching the towbar co e m A A o o GS o Remove the protective cover by first press ing in the catch D gt and then pulling the cover straight back E el 05 G021489 G000000 Ed Insert the towbar until you hear a click EJ Turn the key anticlockwise to
82. the workshop in order to restart the engine after fuelling Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star vation the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check Do this before starting the engine once the fuel tank has been filled with diesel 1 Place the remote key in the ignition switch and push it gently so that it is pulled in see page 74 2 Press the START button without depress ing the brake and or clutch pedal 3 Wait approx 1 minute To start the engine Depress the brake and or clutch pedal and then press the START button again Draining condensation from the fuel filter The fuel filter separates condensation from the fuel Condensation can disrupt engine opera tion The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet or if you suspect that the car has been filled with contaminated fuel IMPORTANT Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter Diesel particle filter DPF Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter which results in more efficient emission con trol The particles in the exhaust gases are col lected in the filter during normal driving So called regeneration is started in order to burn away the particles and empty the filter This requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature Regeneration of the filter takes place automat ically at an interval of approximately 300 900
83. them 3 Fit the cover and screw in the screw RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system Dual Screen G031358 Wireless headphones 1 Unscrew the screw and detach the battery cover 2 Remove the used batteries turn the new batteries in accordance with the symbols in the battery compartment and insert them 3 Fit the cover and screw in the screw If the system is too hot to be used or if bat tery voltage is too low then an information message appears on the screen Environmental care Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batteries in an environmentally safe manner 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 165 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Trip computer General 01010 tn to empty tank 04 Information display and controls READ confirms 2 Thumbwheel browse between menus and options in the trip computer list RESET resets The trip computer s menu is in a variable loop One of the menu options is a blank display it also marks the beginning end of the loop Functions If a warning message appears when the trip computer is used then the message must first be acknowledged before the trip com puter can be reactivated Acknowledge the warning message by pressing READ To change unit for distance and speed con tact a workshop An authorised Volvo work shop is recommended Average speed Av
84. until a clicking sound is heard Reinstall the parts in reverse order Front fog lamps p Lo te N S Remove the cover by pressing in the 4 clips with a thin blade and pulling straight out Unscrew the lamp housing screw and pull it out Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove it Fit a new bulb by turning clockwise Refit the bulb The profile of the bulb holder corresponds to the profile of the foot of the bulb Refit the bulb holder The TOP mark on the bulb holder must always be upward Lamp housing rear G017456 The direction indictor bulb in the rear lamp cluster is replaced from inside the cargo area 1 2 Open the panel Remove the insulation by pulling it straight out Loosen the whole of the bulb by turning its handle anticlockwise Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recom mend that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop 07 Maintenance and service Lamps Location of rear bulbs Number plate lighting Lighting cargo area 4 o pala o O Lamp lens right hand side NM 1 Remove the screws with a screwdriver 1 Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so 1 Position lamps brake light LED 2 Carefully detach the whole lamp housing Mar Wie JAMANING GOMESI0OSE Side position lights SML LED and withdraw it 2 Replace the bulb Di
85. use of fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo s guarantees and any associated service agreement This applies to all engines NOTE It does not apply to cars with engines that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel E85 Extreme weather conditions driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car s performance Catalytic converters The purpose of the catalytic converters is to purify exhaust gases They are located close to the engine so that operating temperature is reached quickly The catalytic converters consist of a monolith ceramic or metal with channels The channel walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum rho dium palladium These metals act as catalysts i e they participate in and accelerate a chem ical reaction without being used up them selves Lambda sond oxygen sensor The Lambda sond is part of a control system intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel economy An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine This value is fed into an electronic system that con tinuously controls the injectors The ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is continuously adjusted These adjustments create optimal conditions for efficient combustion and together with the three way catalytic converter reduce harmful emissions hydrocarbons car bon monoxide and nitrous oxides Petrol Petrol m
86. used Other treatment such as preserving sealing protection lustre sealing or similar could damage the paint work Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo war ranty Water repellent coating D Never use products such as car wax degreaser or similar on glass surfa ces as this could ruin their water repellent properties Take care when cleaning so as not to damage the glass surface To avoid damaging glass surfaces when removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers There is natural wear of the water repellent coating Treatment with a special finishing agent avail able from Volvo dealers is recommended in order to maintain the water repellent proper ties This should be used first after three years and then each year Rustproofing inspection and maintenance The car received a thorough and complete rustproofing at the factory Parts of the body are made of galvanised sheet metal The underbody is protected by a wear resistant anti corrosion compound A thin penetrating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the exposed members cavities closed sections and side doors F i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 07 Maintenance and service Car care 07 gt gt 283 07 Maintenance and service Car care Under normal conditions the rustproofing does not require treatment for approximately 12 years After this period it
87. water and mud e Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time this could cause electrical malfunctions IMPORTANT Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter In depths greater than 25 cm water could enter the transmission This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of these systems In the event of the engine stalling in water do not try restart tow the car from the water to a workshop an authorised Volvo work shop is recommended Risk of engine breakdown Engine gearbox and cooling system Under special conditions for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat in particular with a heavy load For information about overheating when driv ing with a trailer see page 231 e Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates e If the temperature in the engine s cooling system is too high the instrument panel s warning symbol is illuminated and there is a text message displayed there High engine temp Stop safely stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes to cool down e If the text message High engine temp Stop engine or Coolant level low Stop engine is shown then the engine must be switched off after stopping the car e n the event of overheating in the gearbox a
88. waves buildings topographical conditions etc The car can always be locked unlocked using the key blade see page 47 i a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Unique functions PCC G021080 PCC Personal Car Communicator Information button Indicator lamps Using the information button enables access to certain information from the car via the indica tor lamps Using the information button Press the information button E gt All indicator lamps flash for approxi mately 7 seconds and the light travels around on the PCC This indicates that information from the car has been read If any of the other buttons are pressed during this time then the reading is inter rupted M If none of the indicator lamps illumi nates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has trav elled around on the PCC contact a work shop an authorised Volvo workshop is rec ommended Indicator lamps display information in accord ance with the following illustration G043954 D Green continuous light the car is locked Yellow continuous light the car is unlocked Red continuous light the alarm has been triggered since the car was locked O Red light flashing alternately in both indi cator lamps The alarm was triggered less than 5 minutes ago Range PCC The PCC s
89. we en mee nee eee ea oes 202 Bluetooth handsfree 205 BUAN PNONG an 210 05 During your journey Recommendations during driving 216 A Re 219 A NU eee eee 220 A II 224 CA AA 0 228 Driving with ajrailer MH su 231 Towing and ever 237 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 5 Gb Table of contents 07 Maintenance and service Engine compartment Re ce 256 LABS a 263 Wiper blades and washer fluid 269 Bae regen ree re 271 PURES AA PM 274 A M 282 6 E Option accessory for more information see Introduction IS Eo 06 Wheels and tyres A ER ES Changing wheels 2 2 E a ot ore Warning triangle and first aid kit Emergency puncture repair TMK 08 Specifications Type des ina ER eee eee eae 290 Dimensions and weights 292 Engine SPECHICAVIOMS ones 298 ENGINE oa ee 300 AMES and lubricantsr 302 L PA E 304 Wheel and tyres dimensions and pres SUKE A ee 308 El ttrical SIM BB 913 Eds A AMM 314 Symbols initiierdisplaym mn S15 Table of contents E 09 Alphabetical Index Alphabetical IndEX atinicociocnsndanccadids caidos 318 Introduction Important information Introduction A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner s manual ideally before you
90. with caution Manual tailgate operation The system is disengaged if the rubberised pressure plate beneath the outside handle is actuated a second time The tailgate can then be operated manually Opening the tailgate US The tailgate can be opened three ways two of which involve this but ton e Long press on the button in the lighting panel hold the button depressed until the tailgate starts to open e Long press on the button on the remote control key hold the button depressed until the tailgate starts to open e Lightly press the rubberised pressure plate beneath the outside handle and raise the tailgate 02 Locks and alarm Locking unlocking Closing the tailgate UNS Close using this button on the tailgate 10 second delay after the doors have been locked Temporary deactivation or manually 02 e Press the button the tailgate closes auto matically If a door is opened within the delay time then i the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is Stop the opening closing of the tailgate deactivated This can be done four ways of which ME Lie DURON The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock e Press the lighting panel button state with the remote control key The driver s e Press the remote control key button door can also be unlocked with the detachable e Press the tailgate s button Key lade ee DEN e Press the rubberised pressure plate Active menu options a
91. 06 6 Detach the air hose and cable Refit the dust cap gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 253 254 lo A T 200 E o PE vaca soueecunecbvescevenevertussceeedeanens 263 WIRE blades AHODWASD CY Tct e e anisini iaiia inaani nania sanne 269 Baten N a ee a a Zr eee 271 A e A 274 A A e e AAA A 282 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE F i RSS e m a E ke 2 amp T n A ae SL S de y e oa By Oo HE AN R A is l L Ah y An Lo 9 i 07 Maintenance and service 07 Engine compartment General Volvo service programme To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi ble follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work Volvo workshops have the personnel special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service IMPORTANT For the Volvo warranty to apply check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet Check regularly Check the following oils and fluids at regular intervals e g when refuelling e Coolant e Engine oil e Power steering fluid e Washer fluid WARNING Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start automatically some time after the engine has been switched off Always have the engine cleaned by a work shop There is a risk of fire if the engin
92. 70 Interior lighting G021149 Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting Reading lamp left hand side Reading lamp right hand side Interior lighting All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes from when e the engine has been switched off and the remote control key is in position O e the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started Front roof lighting The front reading lamps are switched on or off by pressing the relevant button in the roof con sole Rear roof lighting AN y Hi i G021150 Rear roof lighting The lamps are switched on or off by pressing each respective button Courtesy lighting Courtesy lighting and passenger compart ment lighting is switched on and off respec tively when a side door is opened or closed Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed Vanity mirror The lighting for the vanity mirror see page 204 is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed Lighting cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and off respectively when the tailgate is opened or closed Automatic lighting The switch for passenger compartment light ing has three positions for the lighting in the passenger compartment e Off right hand side depressed automatic lighti
93. 74 mats WARNING The floor mat at the driver s seat must be firmly fitted and secured in the attachment clips to prevent it from being trapped around and under the pedals IMPORTANT Max socket is 10 A 120 W if one socket is used at a time If both sockets are used simultaneously 7 5 A 90 W per socket is applicable WARNING Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use Vanity mirror Electrical socket in cargo area For more information see page 227 G021438 Vanity mirror with lighting The lamp for the vanity mirror on the driver s side and passenger side respectively is 12 V socket in tunnel console rear seat switched on automatically when the cover is The electrical socket can be used for 12 V raised accessories such as mobile phone chargers and coolers For the socket to supply current Option accessory for more information see Introduction General G041316 System overview Mobile phone Microphone 9 Steering wheel keypad Centre console Bluetooth A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys tem The audio system then works handsfree with the option to control a range of the mobile phone s functions remotely The mobile phone can be operated by its own keys irrespective of whether or not it is connected Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the
94. B and iPod in combi nation with Performance audio see the acces sory manual for USB andiPod Music Interface 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Audio system CD functions G021403 F ma E bs il Centre console controls for CD functions CD eject CD insert and eject slot Navigation button for changing CD tracks O Fast wind and change CD track CD changer position selection Scan CD Start playback CD player If a music CD is in the player when CD is pressed then playback is started automatically Otherwise insert a disc and press CD 4 High Performance and Premium Sound Start playback CD changer Start CD playback by pressing the CD button If a music CD is in the player when this takes place then playback is started automatically Otherwise insert a disc and press CD Insert a CD CD changer 1 Select an empty position with the number buttons 1 6 or 4 Y on the navigation button 4 An empty position is marked on the dis play The text Insert disc shows that anew disc can be inserted The CD changer can hold up to six CDs 2 Insert a CD in the CD changer slot Disc eject A CD will stay in the ejected position for approx 12 seconds Following which it is re inserted in the player and playback continues Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but ton Eject all discs with a long press on the eject button The entire
95. Closed e Lateral airflow Vertical airflow Aim the outer vents at the side windows to remove misting A certain air flow always comes from the vents in order to maintain a good climate in the pas senger compartment Air vents in the door pillars G021368 Ey Closed Open e Lateral airflow Vertical airflow Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist ing Aim the vents into the passenger compartment to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear seat NOTE Remember that small children may be sen sitive to air flows and draughts A Option accessory for more information see Introduction Climate control Electronic climate control ECC G039575 ab Ventilated front seats left hand side Fan Heated front seats left hand side Air distribution O Heated front seats right hand side AUTO 7 Ventilated front seats right hand side 8 Temperature control right hand side AC ON OFF Air conditioning On Off Rear window and door mirror defrosters see page 98 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 139 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 140 Climate control Max defroster 12 Recirculation Air quality system 13 Temperature control left hand side Operation Ventilated front seats Ventilated front seats can only be specified when ECC is installed in the car The venti lation system consists of fans in the s
96. During active driving the use of a lower gear is prioritised leading to a delayed upshift Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever to the side from D position to the end position at The information display shifts the indica tion from D to S Sport mode can be selected at any time while driving Geartronic Winter mode It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads if 3rd gear is engaged manually 1 Depress the brake pedal and move the gear lever from the D position to the end position at the instrument panel dis play shifts the indication from D to the fig ure 1 2 Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever forward towards plus twice the display shifts the indication from 1 to 3 3 Release the brake and accelerate carefully The gearbox winter mode means that the car moves off with a lower engine speed and reduced engine power on the drive wheels Kick down When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration a lower gear is immediately engaged This is known as kick down If the accelerator is released from the kick down position the gearbox automatically changes up Kick down is used when maximum accelera tion is needed such as for overtaking Safety function To prevent overrevving the engine the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibitor which prevents the kick down func tion 03
97. EXIT to Do not allow anyone to remain in the car cancel then select one of the follow without first deactivating the deadlocks to ing alternatives avoid the risk of anyone being locked in If you want to switch off deadlocks Press ENTER and lock the car Note that the alarm s movement and tilt detectors are switched off at the same time see page 62 gt The next time the engine is started the system is reset to zero and the instru ment panel display shows the message Full guard at which the deadlocks function and the alarm s movement and tilt detectors are re engaged If you do not want to change the locking system Select no options at all and lock the car or 60 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Child safety locks Manual blocking of the rear doors The child safety locks prevent children from opening a rear door from the inside G021077 The child safety locks are located on the trailing edge of the rear doors and are only accessible when the doors are open To activate deactivate the child safety locks Use the remote control key s detachable key blade to turn the knob see page 47 The door is blocked against opening from the inside The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside e Adoor s knob control only blocks that particular door not both rear doors simultaneously Cars with an electric child safety lock do not have a
98. Fuses 274 Remote control HomeLink programmable ooccconccconccccnnnnincnnnnnannns 125 Remote Control key 44 battery replacement 51 detachable key blade 47 BUG TONS eenean ienaa ses 45 EELNE OPE OPA o A 46 Remote control key system type appro Md rada E 314 Resetting the door mirrors 98 Resetting the power windows 96 Retractable power door mirrors 97 Reverse gear inhibitor 112 Rims e p o A 283 Roof load max weight ccoocccccncccccnnncncnns 293 RUSTO OO Mesure 283 Safety lluna cc 229 Safety MOJO rociar iaa 30 Sale ME Lantana 228 Seat see SlalS oocooccccccnccncccnnconicaninanoncnnnnns 76 Seatbelt A A 17 seatbelt tensioner 18 Seatbelt reminder 17 DE 100 11 PONIA este min 16 E E EE E A E E E E 76 head restraints rear eee eee anes 78 PEANG aaneen iaa 140 lowering the front backrest 76 lowering the rear backrest 79 09 Alphabetical Index C 09 az 09 Alphabetical Index 09 power seats 17 Steering wheel 81 T ventilated front seats 140 keypad 81 130 148 171 210 Securing loads Loading 225 keypad adaptive cruise control 175 TAGA E anana aE EE 58 lara 256 steering wheel adjustment
99. IN code 5 Select to connect to My Car from the mobile phone The mobile phone is registered and connected automatically to the audio system while the text Synchronising is shown in the display For more information on how mobile phones are registered see page 208 When the connection is established the symbol is shown and the mobile phone Bluetooth TM name is shown in the display Now the mobile phone can be controlled from the audio system To call 1 Make sure that the text PHONE is shown at the top of the display and that the symbol is visible 2 Dial the number or use the phone book see page 208 3 Press ENTER The call is interrupted with EXIT Disconnecting the mobile phone Automatic disconnection takes place if the mobile phone moves out of the audio system s range For more information on connection see page 208 Manual disconnection takes place by deacti vating the handsfree function with one long press on PHONE The handsfree function is also deactivated when the engine is switched off or when a door is opened When the mobile phone has been discon nected an ongoing call can be continued with the mobile phone s built in microphone and speaker 206 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Some mobile phones require that the changeover from handsfree is confirmed from the phone s keypad Making and receiving calls Incoming call Calls are accepted with ENTER e
100. La Lo a an 2 0 278 11 7 164 6 9 206 8 6 2 0FA 278 11 7 164 6 9 206 8 6 2 0FA 278 11 8 171 7 2 210 8 8 2 0T man 259 11 1 148 6 4 189 8 1 2 0T 264 11 3 155 6 7 195 8 4 2 5T man 299 12 5 157 Ele 209 8 8 2 5T aut 339 14 2 170 7 1 232 9 7 2 5FTA 299 12 5 157 6 6 209 8 8 2 5FTA aut 339 14 2 170 7 1 232 9 7 08 3 2 aut 308 13 2 160 6 9 214 9 2 01 10 00 11 08 Specifications i 3 2 AWD 320 13 9 169 7 3 224 9 7 T6 AWD aut 344 14 8 175 7 5 237 10 2 D3 188 7 2 119 4 6 144 55 D3 aut 215 8 2 127 4 8 159 6 1 D5 man 177 ay 125 4 7 144 5 4 D5 282 8 8 133 5 0 169 6 4 D5 AWD 255 9 7 148 55 187 7 1 A Flexifuel vehicle can be driven on any 95 octane unleaded petrol or bioethanol E85 as well as all possible mixtures of these two fuels The car consumes 30 40 more E85 which has a lower energy content The precise difference depends on driving style ambient temperature and variations in fuel specification amongst other things 08 gt gt 305 08 Specifications 01 10 OO 11 D3 D3 D5 AWD man D5 AWD aut 2 4D AWDA man 2 4D AWDA A Certain markets A urban driving 1 100 km B driving on main roads 1 100 km C combined driving I 100km 08 351 201 237 247 250 247 250 151 188 E 127 9 0 147 9 4 145 95 153 9 4 145 95 153 Fuel consumption and emissions of carbon dioxide Fuel consumption and emission values in the table above are based on specific EU cycles
101. MP3 and WMA files for Premium Sound and High Performance Activate deac tivate in CD mode under CD settings gt Track information Radio functions A A G021404 Centre console controls for radio functions Navigation button for tuning automatic Cancel function in progress Tuning manual Scan wavelength O Preset storage automatic O Preset buttons and preset storage manual Select wavelength AM and FM FM1 and FM2 Tuning automatic 1 Select wavelength using FM or AM 2 Press d P on the navigation button Audio system Tuning manual 1 Select wavelength using FM or AM 2 Turn TUNING Preset 10 station presets can be stored per wave length FM has 2 memories for presets FM1 and FM2 The stored presets are selected using the preset buttons Preset storage can be carried out manually or automatically Preset storage manual 1 Tune into a station 2 Hold in a station preset button until the message Channel stored appears on the display Preset storage automatic The function is especially useful in areas where the radio stations and their frequencies are unfamiliar The 10 strongest radio stations are stored automatically in a separate memory 1 Select wavelength using FM or AM 2 Hold in AUTO until Autostoring appears on the display Once Autostoring disappears from the dis play the stations are stored The radio contin ues
102. Manual MMT6 Automatic TF 80SC Manual M66 Max weight braked trailer kg 1000 1200 1320 1800 1800 1320 1600 1800 1600 1800 1800 2000 1600 1600 1800 08 Specifications Dimensions and weights Max towball load kg 90 90 19 90 90 75 YE 90 75 90 90 90 75 75 90 01 10 OO 11 08 gt gt 08 Specifications Dimensions and weights Gearbox Max weight braked trailer kg Max towball load kg ies 90 Automatic TF 80SC 2000 D5 AWD Automatic TF 80SC 2000 90 XC70 Gearbox Max weight braked trailer kg Max towball load kg E sn All except 2 0F with Automatic MPS6 1200 50 D3 Manual M66 1600 75 D3 Automatic TF 80SC 1600 15 D5 AWD Manual M66 2100 90 D5 AWD Automatic TF 80SC 2100 90 T6 AWD Automatic TF 80SC 2000 90 2 4D AWD Manual M66 2100 90 2 4D AWD Automatic TF 80SC 2100 90 3 2 AWD Automatic TF 80SC 1800 90 Max weight unbraked trailer kg Max towball load kg 750 50 08 01 10 OO 11 08 Specifications Dimensions and weights The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing bracket is recommended for trailers heavier than 1800 kg 08 08 Specifications Engine specifications 2 0 B4204S3 2 0F B420454 za B52541T11 2 0T B4204T6 25i B5254T10 SZ B6324S5 T6 B6304T4 2 0D D4204T D3 D5204T2 D5 D5244T10 107 6000 107 6000 170 4800 149 6000 170 4800 185 6200 221 5600 100 4000 120 3000 151 4000
103. PVICE BP 3 Text message in the information display When a warning information or indicator sym bol illuminates a corresponding message appears on the information display An error message Is stored in a memory list until the fault is rectified Press READ to acknowledge and browse between the messages If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer the message must be read press READ before the previous activity can be resumed Specification Stop safely Stop engine Service urgent Service required See manual Stop and switch off the engine Serious risk of damage Volvo recom mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop Stop and switch off the engine Serious risk of damage Volvo recom mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop Volvo recommends that you engage an author ised Volvo workshop to check the car immedi ately Volvo recommends that you engage an author ised Volvo workshop to check the car as soon as possible Read the owner s man ual Book time for maintenance Time for regular maintenance Maintenance overdue 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Menus and messages Specification Time to book regular service Volvo recom mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop Time for regular service Volvo recommends that you contact an author ised Volvo workshop The timing is deter mined by
104. Press PHONE and select one of the phones in the list The connection can also be made via the menu system The menu structure is available in two variants depending on whether the car only has Bluetooth handsfree or if the car also has a built in phone e For cars with only Bluetooth handsfree the connection is made under Main menu Bluetooth gt Bluetooth Connect phone or Main menu Bluetooth gt Bluetooth Change phone gt Add phone e For cars with built in phone and Bluetooth handsfree the connection is made under Main menu Bluetooth gt Bluetooth gt Connect phone or Main menu Bluetooth Change phone gt Add phone Phone book All use of the phone book presupposes that the text PHONE is shown at the top of the display and that the K 9 symbol is visible The audio system stores a copy of the phone book from each registered mobile phone The phone book is copied automatically to the audio system during each connection Deactivate the function under Phone settings Synchronise phone book Searching for contacts is only performed in the connected mobile phone s phone book i Option accessory for more information see Introduction If the mobile phone does not support copy ing of the phone book then List is empty is shown when copying is finished If the phone book contains a ringing caller s contact information then this is shown in the display Searching for contacts The easi
105. Press and hold at least 4 seconds to open all windows simultaneously The function can be changed from unlocking all doors simultaneously to unlocking the driv er s door only with one press of the button and after a further press of the button within 10 seconds unlocking the remaining doors The function can be changed in the menu sys tem under Car settings Lock settings gt Doors unlock with both the alternatives All doors and Driver door then all For a description of the menu system see page 130 Approach light duration Used to switch on the car s lighting at a distance For more information see page 87 la Tailgate Unlocks and disarms the alarm for the tailgate only On cars with power tail gate the tailgate is opened after the button is kept depressed For more information see page 58 Panic function Used to attract attention in an emergency Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to acti vate the direction indicators and the horn The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds Otherwise the function switches off automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds Range The remote control key s functions have a range of about 20 m from the car Ifthe car does not verify a button being pressed move closer and try again The remote control key functions can be disrupted by surrounding radio
106. SE or by switching off the engine the set speed is deleted from the memory and cannot be resumed with the button 04 172 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Adaptive cruise control General information on ACC The adaptive cruise control ACC Adaptive Cruise Control helps the driver maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead It provides a more relaxing driving experience on long jour neys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows The driver sets the desired speed and time interval to the car in front When the radar detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the car the speed is automatically adapted to that When the road is clear again the car returns to the selected speed If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or set to the standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle in front then the driver is warned by Distance Alert see page 181 about the short distance WARNING The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis tance The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic weather and road conditions The Function section and onwards informs about limitations of which the driver should be aware before using the adaptive cruise control The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the
107. UX and press on the remote control to listen via the speak ers Selecting within a disc directory 1 Load the disc Press CN 3 Scroll using the navigation buttons to select a file 4 Press to select the subdirectory Different playback options The disc can be played back in different ways scroll with the navigation buttons to select playback option When the dialogue box appears 1 Press the right hand navigation button to move over in the right hand menu 2 Scroll using the navigation buttons to select playback options Confirm with OK Change CD track Change CD track with gt gt or Ex fast wind by holding the buttons depressed Pause Pause and restart the disc with Pil Stop the disc with ma Press again to eject the disc Discs copied privately can be used However playback and quality depend on the quality of the source file format and disc qual ity AUX input Electrical socket 12 V The input allows you to connect other equip ment Always follow the instructions included with the external equipment or from the man ufacturer or reseller when connecting Equip ment connected via the RSE AUX input can use the screens wireless headphones head phones sockets and the car s speakers Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system Dual Screen 04 gt gt 163
108. WARNING The headlamps must be handled with extreme care due to the Xenon lamp being supplied from a high voltage unit The country in which the car is delivered deter mines whether normal position is designed for right or left hand traffic i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Example 1 If a car that is delivered in Sweden shall be driven in the UK then the headlamps must be set to the adjusted position see preceding illustration Example 2 A car that is delivered in the UK is designed for left hand traffic and is driven there with the headlamps in normal position see preceding illustration Halogen headlamps The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens The headlamp pattern may not be as good Masking the headlamps 1 Copy the A and B templates for left hand drive cars or the C and D templates for right hand drive cars with a scale of 1 2 see page 91 Use a photocopier with a zoom function for example e A LHD Right left hand drive right lens e B LHD Left left hand drive left lens e C RHD Right right hand drive right lens e D RHD Left right hand drive left lens 2 Transfer the template to a self adhesive waterproof material and cut it out 03 Your driving environment D Lighting 3 Start from the design line on the headlamp lenses see the dotted line on the side 90 Position the self adhesive templates at the
109. Your driving environment EN 03 gt gt D 03 Your driving environment 03 Gearboxes Geartronic does not permit downshifting kick down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged When kick down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depending on engine speed The car changes up when the engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine Mechanical gear selector inhibitor The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P R N and D Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gearbox has special safety sys tems Keylock To remove the remote control key from the ignition switch the gear selector must be in the P position The remote control key is locked in all other positions Parking position P Stationary car with engine running Keep your foot on the brake pedal when mov ing the gear selector to another position Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking position P To be able to move the gear selector from P to other gear positions the brake pedal must be depressed
110. a certain time The heating can be engaged automatically if the car is started in an outside temperature lower than 7 C The automatic defrosting function must then be activated under Climate settings gt Auto rear defroster For a description of the menu system see page 130 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Interior rearview mirro G021342 Control for dimming Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver Use dimming with the dimming control when lights from behind are distracting 1 Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment 2 Return to normal position by moving the control towards the windscreen Automatic dimming Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror The control is not available in mirrors with automatic dim ming 03 Your driving environment D Windows rearview and door mirrors The compass can only be specified for rear view mirrors with automatic dimming see page 100 03 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 99 D 03 Your driving environment 03 100 Compass Operation G044033 Rearview mirror with compass The upper right hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing Eight di
111. activated deactivated see page 61 02 Locks and alarm 02 gt gt 47 02 Locks and alarm Remote control key key blade 02 48 e access to the glovebox and cargo area privacy locking can be blocked see page 49 e the airbag for front passenger seat PACOS can be activated deactivated see page 22 Removing the key blade G021082 Ep Slide the spring loaded catch to the side p At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards Attaching the key blade Carefully refit the key blade into its location in the remote control key 1 Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot 2 Lightly press the key blade You should hear a click when the key blade is locked in Unlocking doors with the key blade If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key e g if the batteries are dis charged then the driver s door can be opened as follows 1 Unlock the driver s door with the key blade in the door handle s lock cylinder When the door has been unlocked using the key blade and is opened the alarm is trig gered 2 Deactivate the alarm by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch For a car with the Keyless system see page 54 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm Privacy locking General information on privacy locking locked and th
112. airbag system 19 Warning trlan le s ss 249 Washer fluid filling 270 Washer nozzles heated 93 Washers rear WIN COW ns vincia 93 washer fluid filling 270 WHO SClCC I ass tenctnusatennscansareiansasaterscesies 93 Water and dirt repellent coating 95 Water repellent surface cleaning 283 a A o A TA 283 Weights kerb Weldtesacnisdona ia 293 Wheels o E 246 PST AU Mecano s 246 PP 243 SHOW CAINS sd ronde rie 244 spare wheel 247 Wheels and tyres 242 Whiplash injury WHIPS 27 WHIPS child seat booster cushion 27 whiplash injury 27 Windows rearview and door mirrors 95 Windscreen washing 93 Windscreen Wwipers 92 cue sse 92 09 Alphabetical Index a z 09 D 09 Alphabetical Index 09 Winter CWI 22 8 217 Winter CVS poe mrsenes 244 Wiper DAS sieste 269 CHANGIN A e 269 cleanin osa en oe ere 270 replacing rear window 210 service position 269 Wipers and washing 92 Volvo for life VOLVO Volvo Car Corporation TP 11753 English AT 1020 Printed in Sweden G teborg 2010 Copyright 2000 2010 Volvo Car Corporation
113. al Distant 1 5 5 Regional 1 5 6 Reset all FM settings Radio system DAB General DAB Digital Audio Broadcasting is a digital broadcasting system for radio This system does not support DAB Service and Ensemble e Service Channel radio channel only audio services are supported by the sys tem e Ensemble A collection of radio channels on the same frequency 7 During a build up phase DAB will not cover the whole country but will only work in larger urban areas Option accessory for more information see Introduction Storing channel groups Ensemble learn When the vehicle is moved to a new broad casting area programming of existing channel groups in the area can take place Programming of channel groups creates an updated list of all available channel groups The list is not updated automatically Program ming takes place via the Ensemble learn menu or directly by means of a long press on AUTO If can take up to a minute to program a channel group if both Band III and LBand are selected Wavelength DAB is transmitted on two wavelengths Band lll and LBand e Band III over the whole country e Band mainly in large cities By selecting for example Band II on its own channel programming takes place more quickly than if both Band III and LBand are selected It is not certain that all channel groups will be found Wavelength selection does not affect the stored memories Navigation
114. ally deteriorate For this reason aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them This is espe cially important with regard to winter tyres The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture This is the tyre s DOT marking Department of Transportation and this is stated with four digits for example 1510 The tyre in the illustration was manufac tured in week 15 of 2010 Summer and winter tyres When summer and winter wheels are changed the wheels should be marked with which side of the car they were mounted on for example L for left and R for right Wear and maintenance The correct tyre pressure results in more even wear see page 248 Driving style tyre pres sure climate and road condition affect how quickly your tyres age and wear To avoid dif ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns arising the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other A suitable dis tance for the first change is approx 5000 km and then at 10 000 km intervals Volvo recom mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth If significant differences in wear gt 1 mm difference in tread depth between tyres have already occurred the least worn tyres must always be placed on the rear Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer and leads to the car continuing for wards in a straight line rather than having the rear end s
115. amera sensor clean from ice snow mist and dirt Do not attach or fit anything to the wind screen in front of the camera sensor as this could reduce or prevent the function of one or more camera dependent systems The camera sensors have limitations similar to the human eye i e they see worse in dark ness heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for example Under such conditions the functions of camera dependent systems could be sig nificantly reduced or temporarily disengaged Strong oncoming light reflections in the car riageway snow or ice on the road surface dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings could also significantly reduce a camera sensor func tion Functions such as scanning the carriage way and detecting other vehicles for example During very high temperatures the camera is temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started in order to protect camera functionality Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Windscreen Sensors blocked then this means that the Camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles or road markings in front of the car In turn this means that the Collision Warning with Auto Brake Lane Departure Warning and Driver Alert Control functions are not operating with full functionality The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action The windscreen sur face in front of the
116. ances Maintain each position for approx 15 seconds before trying a new one Depress the button for the original remote control and the button to be programmed on HomeLink simultaneously Do not release the buttons until the indicator lamp has changed over from slow to rapid flash ing The rapid flashing indicates successful programming Test the programming by depressing the programmed button on HomeLink and watching the indicator lamp e Constant glow The indicator lamp illu minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed this indicates that the programming is complete The garage door gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed e Glow not constant The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx 3 seconds This proc 1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer i a Option accessory for more information see Introduction ess is repeated for approx 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a roll ing code The garage door gate or sim ilar is not activated when the pro grammed HomeLink button is depressed Continue the programming in accordance with the following Locate the programming button on the receiver for the garage door for example normally located close to the antenna s bracket on the receiver If you have diffi culty in finding the but
117. and hard cornering The car s centre of gravity and driving cha racteristics are altered by roof loads For information on maximum permitted roof load including load carriers and any space box see page 293 05 During your journey OOOO Ai Lowering the rear seat backrest To simplify loading in the cargo area the rear seat backrest can be folded down see page 78 Cargo retaining straps Securing loads A a G019397 Load secured in both upper and lower mounting Strap retention pon One loop of the cargo retaining strap around 05 In the floor of the cargo area there are two rails one of the cargo retaining hooks secures the with movable cargo retaining hooks for secur strap and prevents it from sliding around the ing items in the cargo area using cargo retain hook ing straps On both sides of the cargo area there are sev NOTE eral mounting points designed for securing O IMPORTANT o loads They are located in the floor and in the A suitable width for a cargo retaining strap op edge of both sides of the cargo area Do not use other adjustable straps as these is approx 25 mm p i could pull and break the mounting points WARNING l Cleaning Hard sharp and or heavy objects that are Dirt and objects collecting down in the rails a ra Fees could cause injury during could hinder the repositioning locking raising O and removal of the cargo retaining hooks Always secure large and heavy objects with Make it a
118. and the remote control key must be in position Il see page 74 Shiftlock Neutral N If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds irrespective of whether the engine is running then the gear selector is locked To be able to move the gear selector from N to other gear positions the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in position Il see page 74 Deactivating the automatic gear selector inhibitor If the car cannot be driven e g due to a flat battery the gear selector must be moved from the P position so that the car can be moved ED Lift the rubber mat in the compartment behind the centre console and open the hatch E Fully insert the key blade Press the key blade down and hold For information on the key blade see page 47 Esp Move the gear selector from the P position Automatic gearbox Powershift D Automatic gear positions M Manual gear positions Powershift is a six stage automatic gearbox that has double mechanical clutch discs in contrast to a conventional automatic gearbox A conventional automatic gearbox has a hydraulic torque converter that transfers power from the engine to the gearbox Powershift transmission operates in the same way and has similar controls and functions as 2 Only 4 cyl model 2 0 2 0T 2 0F the Geartronic automatic transmission descri bed in the previous section
119. ap E O ne ARS E E 57 K Ay sateen position parking lamps 84 re AS eee ae AN rear fog larva 85 Locks WISE is i l l Lighting bulb replacement cinc 263 ue 1 so icisntoceieromncetinseivess 56 Key DOSINONS sicicocusiioexnitasivsdeceecmdstecdseeieuly 74 WG HAG ee 56 CANO AV CA id 267 nocki 56 diposd bear alone ciecn 264 D teeseeraeceseeereces direction indicators EE eee SS 265 Lubricants a wn 302 L IG AMIS ira aaa 266 Lubricants capacities 302 lamp housing Fear 266 Labels Cs eee eee ee 290 lamp housing rear direction indica Laminated glass 95 e cures 266 li Lamps see Lighting 263 main beam Xenon lamp 265 Lane Departure Control 193 AIDES nagger ES 2604 Main dipped beam see Lightning 82 number plate lighting 267 Leather upholstery washing instructions 284 ae parking ati aa Eo sinian 283 e G an S 263 side marker laMpS 266 Active Xenon headlamps 83 cs eiennenn 268 Making calls 206 210 approach light duration 87 Light SWITCRES rss 80 Manual gearbox 112 automatic lighting passenger compart TOWING and recovery 237 ment LL 86 Manual gear positions Geartronic a 113 D 09 Alphabetical Index 09 Max roro caspen sdecaisitesiweaiens 293 Memory function in seats 17 Menus and messages 130 Menu struct
120. arking assistance Parking camera RTI Control module AWD Active chassis Four C Rear wiper Interior lighting Power driver s seat Information display DIM 5 i i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 0006 66060060 Adaptive cruise control ACC collision warning system Interior lighting Rain sen sor Steering wheel module Central locking system rear fuel filler flap Washers Windscreen washers Opening tailgate Lock tailgate Fuel pump Remote control key receiver Alarm Climate Steering lock Alarm OBDII T9 GS 10 Ws S 10 10 20 15 07 gt gt 2 9 07 Maintenance and service 10 4 B 48 Airbag 10 Collision warning system 5 radar front 20 Accelerator pedal electric 1 5 engine block heater die sel power door mirrors seat heating rear A Infotainment ICM CD amp 15 Radio Pa Brake light 5 PE Sun roof 20 2 Immobiliser 5 A Not Premium or High Performance 07 280 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 07 Maintenance and service Cargo area G042345 The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left hand side METI ES AECA ES MES D Trailer socket 1 Electric parking brake left 30 AD 2 Electric parking brake right 30 O E j 07 Rear window defroster 30 Trailer socket 2 15 D POT aut
121. ary At the next attempt to retrieve the preset the channel which contained the sub 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt EN 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 Audio system channel will be played The preset is not dependent on the channel list saved channel does not have to be in the channel list for it to be playable If the channel is loaded when it is not available then a preset number is shown and there is silence until an available preset is selected for loading Alter natively another channel The audio system s DAB system does not support all functions available in the DAB standard Menu structure DAB Main menu DAB Ts Select ensemble 2 Select service 3 Select subchannel 4 DAB PTY 4 1 DAB PTY off 4 2 News 4 3 Current affairs 4 4 Information 4 5 Sport 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 27 Education Drama Arts Science Talk Pop music Rock music Calm music Light classic Classical music Other music Weather Finance Children Factual Religion Phone in Travel Leisure Jazz and blues Country music National music 4 28 Oldies music 4 29 Folk music 4 30 Documentary Ensemble learn DAB settings 6 1 DAB display settings 6 1 1 Ensemble name 6 1 2 Ensemble name and PTY 6 1 3 Basic 6 2 DAB to DAB link 6 3 FM traffic 6 4
122. assenger airbag PACOS is located on the passenger end of the instru ment panel and is accessible when the pas senger door is open see under the heading below Activating deactivating Check that the switch is in the required posi tion Volvo recommends that the remote con trol key s key blade be used to change posi tion For information on the key blade see page 47 Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger the life of passengers in the car If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag but does not have a PACOS switch Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch then the airbag will always be activated Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas senger seat if the message in the roof panel see page 23 indicates that the airbag is deactivated and if the warning symbol for the airbag system is also displayed in the combined instrument panel This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction Visit a workshop as soon as possible Volvo recommends that you contact an author ised Volvo workshop Activating deactivating Ki a hi 1 s s ar G044058 we os nl Switch location The airbag is activated With the switch in this position persons taller than 140 c
123. at there is no brake support or it comes late If warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing then the warning distance can be reduced This would lead to the system warn ing at a later stage which reduces the total number of warnings When the car is reversing Collision Warning with Auto Brake cannot be activated Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti vated at low speeds under 4 km h which is why the system does not intervene in situations where the car is approaching a vehicle in front very slowly e g when parking Driver commands are always prioritised which is why Collision Warning with Auto Brake does not intervene in situations where the driver is steering braking or accelerating in a clear manner even if a collision is unavoidable When Auto Brake has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta tionary for a maximum of 1 5 seconds If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand Camera sensor limitations The car s camera sensor is used by the three functions Collision Warning with Auto Brake Driver Alert Control see page 190 and Lane Departure Warning see page 193 Keep the windscreen surface in front of the c
124. at transverse max 10 kg E G 2 E Infant seat rear facing max 10 kg E OK OK Infant seat rear facing max 13 kg OK OK D OK OK C OK Child seat rear facing 9 18 kg D OK OK C OK TT 01 Safety 01 Child safety Type of child seat Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats D Frontseat Outerrearseat Front facing child seat 9 18 kg B OKA OKA B1 OK OK A Ok OK A Volvo recommends rear facing child seats for this group nting points fo ild seats Volvo recommends that small children should points see the seat manufacturer s instruc sit in rear facing child seats to as late an age tions as possible The child seat s straps must always be For cars with folding head restraints on the routed under the rear head restraints before outside seats the head restraints should be being tensioned at the mounting point folded to facilitate the installation of this type of child seat For cars equipped with a cargo area cover over the cargo area this must be removed A fo a o o The car is equipped with upper mounting before a child seat can be fitted in the points for certain front facing child seats mounting points These mounting points are located on the rear of the seat For detailed information on how the child seat The upper mounting points are primarily should be tensioned in the upper mounting intended for use with front facing child seats hE 01 Safety
125. ating but regular cleaning is required in order to maintain both characteristics and appearance Volvo offers a comprehensive product for the clean ing and treatment of leather upholstery which when used in accordance with the instructions preserves the leather s protective coating After a period of use the natural appearance of the leather will nevertheless emerge depend ing more or less on the surface texture of the leather This is a natural maturing of the leather and shows that it is a natural product To achieve best results Volvo recommends cleaning and the application of protective cream once to four times per year or more if necessary The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail able from your Volvo dealer IMPORTANT e Certain items of coloured clothing for example jeans and suede garments may stain the upholstery e Never use strong solvents Such prod ucts may damage fabric vinyl and leather upholstery Washing instructions for leather upholstery 1 Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened sponge and squeeze out a strong foam 2 Work the dirt away with gentle circular movements 3 Dab accurately with the sponge on the stains Allow the sponge to absorb the stain Do not rub 4 Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and allow the leather to dry completely Protective treatment of leather upholstery 1 Pour a small amount of the protective cream on the felted cloth and massage in a thin lay
126. audio system is used when the engine is switched off This is to avoid discharging the battery unnecessar ily 4 The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc If the audio system is active when the engine is switched off then it is activated automatically next time the engine is started Overview Input for external audio source AUX and USB e g iPod Steering wheel keypad Centre console control panel Control panel with headphones socket Option accessory for more information see Introduction Steering wheel keypad pa Confirm selection in menu system accept phone call 2 Lead up in menu system Interrupt current function end refuse phone calls clear entered characters Volume O A short press scrolls between CD tracks or preset radio stations A long press fast winds CD tracks or seeks the next availa ble radio station Rear control panel with headphones socket Headphones with an impedance of 16 32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher are recommended for best sound reproduc tion VOLUME Volume left and right 2 Scroll search forward and backward MODE Select between AM FM CD AUX USB e g iPod DAB1 DAB2 and On Off For connection via AUX or USB see page 151 Headphones sockets 3 5 mm Activating deactivating The control panel is activated with MODE Deactivation is possible via a long press on MODE or when t
127. ay have been lost even if it appears to be undamaged In addition replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged The new seatbelt must be type approved and intended for installation in the same position as the replaced seatbelt Seatbelts Seatbelts and pregnancy o a D S a 3 OM 1 The seatbelt should always be worn during pregnancy But it is then crucial that it be worn in the correct way The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen It must never be allowed to ride upward Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible In addition check that there are no twists in the seatbelt Asthe pregnancy progresses pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control ofthe vehicle as they drive which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel The aim should be to posi tion the seat with as large a distance as possi ble between abdomen and steering wheel Seatbelt reminder j Fa o A N N o 0 Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual reminder The audio reminder is speed dependent and in some cases time depend ent The visual reminder
128. by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos tools sible The car s handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel The car s ground clearance is affected accordingly Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine 2 Undo the retaining screw wash the car If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle you cannot use snow chains at the same time On all wheel drive cars the drive on 4 Lift out the spare wheel the rear axle can be disconnected The spare wheel must not be repaired The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table see page 310 Taking out the spare wheel 1 Fold up the cargo area floor from the rear and forwards Lift out the foam block with its tools i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Wheels and tyres 06 247 06 Tyre pressure G021830 The tyre pressure decal on the driver s side door pillar between frame and rear door shows which pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions This is also specified in the tyre pressure table see page 310 e Tyre pressure for the car s recommended tyre dimension e ECO pressure e Spare wheel tyre pressure Temporary Spare OKT Temperature differences change the tyre pressure 1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy Fuel economy ECO pressure At speeds under 160 km h the general tyre
129. cccovisesduossannucsxebveccaseetseonxe 22 AIRBAG asian dida 20 Airbag system sosncarcioranocarancdar rosca acarician 19 Alir conditioning sintieran 141 general A A 137 Air conditioning AC 141 Air distribution 138 143 Alr SALES PP 139 PE CELA y OC oo 62 alarm Molc O inside 62 alarmi Signali aenieiai aa 62 o AAA E ES 62 checking the Alam 46 ce A 62 deactivating a triggered alarm 62 reduced alarm level 63 temporary disarming of the alarm 63 testing the alarm system 63 PIC CIO GK esianisatontatncevsatavestininerenioniiaisthivia 103 Allergy and asthma inducing sub o oe eee eee 138 All wheel drive AWD 117 All Wheel Drive AWD 117 Approach light duration 87 Audio headphones socket 149 rear control panel 149 SINO Sta een 149 SUP OUI ramener cesse 148 Audio SYSTEM iia 148 WACUON Sinn ida 149 OVCIVICW cccccecececececececaecececucececeeaeaees 148 Audio volume PAON nan du 207 phone media player 207 ring Signal phone 207 Auto climate control settings 141 Automatic Car washes 282 Automatic gearbox 112 manual gear positions Geartronic 113 TOWING and recovery 237 eE A A E 232 Automatic IOCKING usscidonrsisar nic 56 Automatic r locKiINg 56 A ER E on 148 Auxiliary Neate casio 147 AWD All wheel drive 117 BARRES aa 76 front seat lowering
130. correct distance and speed even when the adaptive cruise control is being used IMPORTANT Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Function 7 EH Re an Ti El a K Functions overview Warning lamp braking by driver required Steering wheel keypad Radar sensor Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise control system and a coordinated spacing sys tem Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 173 EN 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 174 Adaptive cruise control Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system The driver must inter vene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles Nor for oncoming slow or stationary vehi cles and objects Do not use the adaptive cruise control for example in city traffic in dense traffic at junctions on slippery surfaces with a lot of water or slush on the road in heavy rain snow in poor visibility on winding roads or on slip roads The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly measured by a radar sensor Cruise control regulates the speed with acceleration and braking It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound
131. creen and headlamp washers share 4 Press the new wiper blade into position a common reservoir Check that it is firmly installed 5 Lower the wiper arm O IMPORTANT 07 CI Add washer antifreeze during the winter so anna that the fluid does not freeze in the pump For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen see reservoir and hoses page 282 and onwards For capacities see page 302 Warning symbols on the battery Use protective goggles Further information in the owner s manual Store the battery out of the reach of children The battery contains cor A rosive acid Avoid sparks and naked flames Risk of explosion An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally responsible manner it contains lead Operation e Check that the cables to the battery are correctly connected and properly tight ened e Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running The service life and function of the battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts discharging driving style driving con ditions climatic conditions etc Battery IMPORTANT Never use a quick charger to charge the battery WARNING Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas which is highly explosive One spark which can be generated if the jump leads are con nected incorrectly is sufficient to make the battery explode The battery contains sul phuric acid which can cause serious burns I
132. cuirioonionincinarcirceraricirina 130 Cooling SS Musas 216 Crash see Collision 30 Cruise CONT Ol encarnado acia 171 CZIP Clear Zone Interior Package 138 DAB menu structure ees 160 DAB RAI dem 158 D ATIOCKS aid 59 CCACIIVA OM airada 59 temporary deactivation 59 po ns 141 E o e ne 221 Diesel particle filter oooccconccoc 222 Dipstick electronic 259 Direction indicators 85 Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor 114 Displa lIdhiNg 82 Distance Alert ans 181 Dolby Surround Pro Logic 148 Door TIN ONS doi 97 Driver Alert Control 190 Driver Alert System 190 COEVI cannae n aE 216 cooling SYSICNNE 44m 216 with the tailgate open 217 With traller asneiras 231 Driving in water 216 Driving with a trailer LOW Dall IDC 293 towing CAPACIDE ue 293 DSTC see also Stability control system 168 E ECC electronic climate contro l 139 Economical driVing 216 ECO pressure 248 Electrical SOCKEL 204 cargo ini ar um 227 ESLIRE EE E E un 204 Electric parking brake 122 low battery voltage 122 releasing automatically 123 releasing manually 123 09 Alphabetical Index a z 09 Emergency Call 210 Error messages Fog lamp Emer
133. d menu e g Car settings with the navigation buttons and press ENTER a submenu opens 3 Scroll to Lock settings and press ENTER a new submenu opens 4 Scroll to Doors unlock and press ENTER a submenu of selectable func tions opens 5 Choose between the options and press ENTER a cross is marked in the option s empty box 6 Exitthe programming by backing out of the menus incrementally with short presses on EXIT or with one long press The navigation buttons can be used instead of ENTER and EXIT when navigating in the menu 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Menus and messages hierarchy The right hand arrow is equal to Collision warning settings Reset all audio settings ENTER and the left hand arrow to EXIT Parking camera settings Main menu FM The menu options are numbered and can also oa L rt FM sett be selected directly with the numerical keypad ANS PANIERS no only 1 9 Steering force level News Unit settings TP Traffic information Menu overview The phone and audio sources each have sep Driver Alert on Radio text arate main menus An audio source main menu Climate settings PTY Program type e g CD can only be accessed when that par A ma ticular audio source is active see page 149 Automatic blower adjust Advanced radio settings 04 The following menu options are included in Recirculation timer Audio settings Main menu Auto rear defroster Main menu DAB 3 Car Key memory Seat heat
134. d on steep downhill gradients with a foot only on the accelerator pedal without using the footbrake The sensitivity of the accelerator pedal decreases and becomes more precise by means of the full actuation of the pedal being restricted to adjusting engine speed within a limited range The brake system brakes itself and provides the car with a low and even speed so allowing the driver to fully focus on steering HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients with an uneven road surface and slippery sec tions E g when launching a boat on a trailer from a ramp 1 HDC is only available on the XC70 WARNING HDC does not work in all situations but is instead only intended to be supplementary assistance The driver always has ultimate responsibility that the car is driven safely Function HDC is engaged or disengaged using a switch on the centre console An indicator lamp in the button illuminates when the function is switched on When HDC is operating the symbol illuminates and the display shows Hill descent control ON The function only operates in first gear position and in reverse gear For an automatic gearbox gear position 1 must be selected which is shown with the figure 1 in the trip computer display see page 113 HDC cannot be activated in an automatic gearbox with the gear selector in position D Operation HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of 10 km h forwards with engine braking and 7
135. decreases to below 60 km h then the function resumes standby mode and the display shows Lane Depart Warn Unavailable If the vehicle crosses the left or right hand side marking of the carriageway without due cause then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal No warning is given in the following situations e Direction indicators activated e The driver has his her foot on the brake pedal e n the event of the accelerator pedal being depressed rapidly e Inthe event of rapid steering wheel move ments e Inthe event of a sudden turn so that the car rolls The camera sensor also has certain limitations For more information see page 187 The driver is only warned once each time the wheels cross a line So there is no acoustic alarm when there is a line between the car s wheels i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 193 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Driver Alert System LDW Symbols and messages in the display qu Lane departure warning y Q On Off D L Lane Depart Warn Unavail able 04 Lane Depart Warn Availa ble Windscreen Sensors blocked Driver Alert Sys Service required The function is switched on off Shown at switch on off The text disappears after 5 seconds Speed is lower than 60 km h the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily
136. disengaged Read about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 187 The function scans the carriageway s side markings The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged Shown in the event of snow ice or dirt on the windscreen for example e Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor Read about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 187 The system is disengaged e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 194 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Driver Alert System LDW Personal preferences See the centre console display with its menu system and there search for Car settings gt Lane departure warning see page 131 Select from the options On at start up This option sets the function in standby mode each time the engine is started Otherwise the same value as when the engine was switched off is obtained Increased sensitivity This option increases sensitivity an alarm is triggered earlier and fewer limitations apply 04 Comfort and driving pleasure D i A i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 195 04 196 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Park assist syst General Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console display indicate the distance to the detected obstacle Parking assistance is a
137. djusted for both height and depth 1 Pull the lever towards you to release the steering wheel 2 Adjust the steering wheel to the position Keypads in the steering wheel that suits you Cruise control see page 171 3 Push back the lever to fix the steering wheel in place If the lever is stiff press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as 2 Audio and phone control see page 148 you push the lever back Adaptive cruise control see page 173 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 81 D 03 Your driving environment Lighting Light switches The display lighting is automatically subdued Main dipped beam in darkness the sensitivity is set with the thumbwheel The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumbwheel 03 Headlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical align ment of the headlamp beam which could daz zle oncoming motorists Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden G021141 G021142 1 Allow the engine to run or have the remote Overview light switches control key in position I Headlamp control and stalk switch 1 Thumbwheel for adjusting display and ER Position for main beam flash ue 2 Roll the thumbwheel up down to raise instrument lighting lower beam alignment gt Position for main beam Rear fog lamp Cars with Xenon headlamps have automatic Front fo
138. e misting and bad air Activate deactivate the function under Climate settings gt Recirculation timer For a description of the menu system see page 130 OL When Defroster is selected recirculation is always deactivated Air quality system The air quality system sepa rates gases and particles to Ereg reduce the levels of odours and pollution in the passenger compartment If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated When the AUTO button is depressed the air quality sensor is always engaged Activating recirculation air quality sensor Switch between the three functions by pressing the but Les ares ton repeatedly Option accessory for more information see Introduction e The left hand orange lamp illuminates the air quality sensor is disengaged There is no recirculation only fresh air e The centre green lamp illuminates recir culation not engaged providing it is not required for cooling in hot weather e The right hand orange lamp illuminates recirculation is engaged The air quality sensor should always be engaged in order to obtain the best air in the passenger compartment Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting If the insides of the windows start misting up disengage the air quality sensor and the defroster functions for the windscreen the side and the rear windows should also be
139. e sel fuel from well known producers Never use diesel of dubious quality At low temperatures 6 C to 40 C a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel which may lead to ignition problems Special diesel fuel designed for low temperatures around freezing point is available from the major oil companies This fuel is less viscous at low tem peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre cipitate The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled When 1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME but further amounts must not be added refuelling check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork Wash off any spillage with deter gent and water IMPORTANT Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard The sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm IMPORTANT Diesel type fuels which must not be used e Special additives e Marine Diesel Fuel e Fuel oil e RME Rape Methyl Ester and vegeta ble oil These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty Empty tank The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel the 05 During your journey Ss 05 gt gt 05 During your journey 05 222 tank may need to be vented in
140. e changed afterwards at a workshop 1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Activating the Bypass function e Depress and hold the left hand stalk switch READ button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for approx 5 seconds the display first shows Bypass activated Wait 1 minute and then Alcoguard Bypass enabled after which the engine can be started This function can be activated several times The error message shown during driving can only be cleared at a workshop Activating the Emergency function e Depress and hold the left hand stalk switch READ button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for approx 5 seconds the display shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled and the engine can be started This function can be used once after which a reset must be made at a workshop Alcoguard Symbols and display messages In addition to the previously described mes sages the combined instrument panel s dis play can also show the following Display text Meaning Action Alcoguard Restart The engine has been possible switched off for less than 30 minutes engine starting pos sible without new test Contact a work shop Alcoguard Service required Alcoguard No sig Transmission failed nal send manually with button 3 or take a new breath test Alcoguard Invalid Test failed take a test new breath test Blowing too short blow for longer Alc
141. e L and R buttons simultaneously The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended posi tion Storing the position The mirror positions are stored in the key mem ory when the car has been locked with the remote control key When the car is unlocked with the same remote control key the mirrors and the driver s seat adopt the stored positions when the driver s door is opened The function can be activated deactivated under Car Key memory Seat mirror positions For a description of the menu sys tem see page 130 Angling the door mirror when parking The door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when parking for example Engage reverse gear and press the Lor R button When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position after about 10 seconds or earlier by pressing the button labelled L or R respectively Automatic angling of the door mirror when parking When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is automatically angled down so that the driver can see the side of the road when parking for example When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original posi tion after a while The function can be activated deactivated under Car settings Side mirror settings Auto tilt left mirror or Auto tilt right mirror For a description of the menu system see page 130 Automatic retraction when locking When the car
142. e button located in the centre between the backrest and head restraint see illustration must be pressed in while the head restraint is pressed down Manual lowering of the outer head restraints rear seat G043830 Pull the locking handle closest to the head restraint to fold the head restraint forward The head restraint is moved back manually until a click can be heard 78 ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD Lowering the rear seat backrest There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down The seat belts must not be connected either Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery When the backrest has been raised the red indicator should no longer be showing If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place 03 G043831 y Ty A The triple section backrest can be folded in different ways Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seats are firmly locked after raising The front seats may need to be pushed for Electrical lowering of the rear seat s wards and or the backrests adjusted outer head restraints upwards in order that the rear backrests can be folded forward fully e The left hand section can be folded sepa If the centre backrest is being lowered rately fold and adjust the centre backrest s head e The centre section can be
143. e driver has to brake in order to achieve full brake force Operation Settings are made from the centre console dis play via a menu system For information on how the menu system is used see page 130 The Brake Support and Auto Brake func tions are always enabled they cannot be deactivated On and Off To select whether the collision warning system should be switched on or off In the menu Car settings Collision warning settings choose between the options On or Off When starting the engine the setting that was selected when the engine was switched off is obtained automatically Activating deactivating warning signals The warning lamp is activated automatically when the engine is started if the system is switched on The warning sound can be activated deacti vated separately using the options for On or Off in the menu system under Car settings gt Collision warning settings gt Warning sound Set warning distance The warning distance regulates the distance at which the visual and acoustic warnings are deployed Select one of the options from Long Normal or Short in the menu system under Car settings Collision warning settings Warning distance The warning distance determines the system s sensitivity Warning distance Long provides an earlier warning First test with Long and if this setting produces too many warnings which could be perceived as irritating in certain sit uations then change to
144. e is hot Raising the car Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question If a jack other than one recommended by Volvo is selected then follow the instructions included with the equipment If the car is raised with a workshop jack posi tion the jack against the front edge on the engine s subframe Do not damage the splashguard under the engine Ensure that the workshop jack is posi tioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack Always use axle stands or similar If you raise the car using a two pillar workshop lift ensure that the front and rear lift arms are fixed under the lifting points on the door sill See preceding illustration Opening and closing the bonnet 4 a ol D A f 0 Engine compartment 9 o o 0 Pull the handle by the pedals You will hear when the catch releases Move the catch to the left and open the bonnet The catch hook is located between the headlamp and grille see illus tration Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed Engine compartment overview TI E The appearance of the engine compartment may vary depending on engine variant Coolant expansion tank 2 Power steering fluid reservoir Engine oil dipstick Radiator E Filler opening for engine oil QO Brake and clutch fluid reservoir left hand drive Battery Relay and fuse box engine compartmen
145. e new fuel mixture Adaptation takes place automatically when the car is driven for a short period at an even speed IMPORTANT After the fuel mixture in the tank has been changed an adaptation should be made by driving at an even speed for about 15 minutes If the battery has been discharged or discon nected then a slightly longer period of driving is required for the adaptation as the memory for the electronics has been cleared 4 G041486 If the battery is flat then the car can be started with current from another battery The following points are recommended when using a donor battery in order to avoid the risk of an explosion 1 Insert the remote control key in key posi tion 0 see page 74 Ensure that the donor battery is 12 volt Ifthe donor battery is in another car switch off the donor car s engine in the other car and ensure that the cars do not touch one another 4 Connect the red jump lead to the positive terminal on the donor battery O Dl Open the clips on the front cover of the battery in your car and remove the cover see page 272 Connect the red jump lead to the battery s positive terminal Connect one end of the black jump lead to the donor battery s negative terminal IMPORTANT Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment 8 10 Connect the other clamp to an earthing point right hand
146. e page 264 2 Remove the small round cover Detach the bulb by pressing the holder 3 For better access detach the main beam 3 Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the downwards bulb first bulb 4 Unplug the connector from the bulb 4 Pull the cable in order to withdraw the bulb 4 Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it holder It can only be installed in one way in It can only be secured in one position 5 Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one 5 Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press Reinstall the parts in reverse order It can only be secured in one position until a clicking sound is heard 6 Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press 6 Refit the cover It must be fitted and 07 until a clicking sound is heard pressed in until a clicking sound is heard Reinstall the parts in reverse order Reinstall the parts in reverse order gt gt 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 265 07 Maintenance and service 07 266 Lamps Side marker lamps G021751 Before starting to replace a bulb see page 263 Mi 2 3 Detach the headlamp Remove the small round cover Pull the cable in order to withdraw the bulb holder Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one It can only be installed in one way Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press until a clicking sound is heard Refit the cover It must be fitted and pressed in
147. e tailgate lock is disconnected Activating deactivating from the central locking the tailgate cannot be opened with either the central locking button in 02 the front doors or the remote control key This means that the remote control key without key blade can only be used to activate deacti vate the alarm to open the doors and to drive the car The remote control key without key blade can then be handed over to the service or hotel staff E the loose key blade is retained by the car Activating privacy locking To activate privacy locking Do not forget to pull out the cargo cover A over the cargo area before closing the tail E Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock gate see page 230 cylinder gt Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise The keyhole is vertical in the locked posi tion for privacy locking fe Pull out the key blade The information dis play shows a message at the same time The glovebox is then locked and the tailgate 8 can no longer be unlocked with the remote Active locks for remote control key without key conte Ise O Tile Cee ec Nin UGN blade and privacy locking activated The privacy locking function is intended for when the car is left for service with a hotel parking valet or similar The glovebox is then gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 49 02 Locks and alarm Privacy locking 02 Do not reinsert the key blade into the remote control
148. e timer Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2 The timer can only be programmed when the remote control key is in key position l see page 74 programming must therefore be carried out before starting the engine 1 Scroll with the thumbwheel to Park heat timer 1 2 Briefly press RESET to move to the flash ing hours setting 3 Select the required hour using the thumb wheel 4 Briefly press RESET to move to the flash ing minutes setting 5 Select the required minute using the thumbwheel 6 Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting 7 Press RESET to activate the timer After setting Park heat timer 1 a second start time can be programmed with Park heat timer 2 by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel Set the alternative time in the same way as Park heat timer 1 i a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Deactivating a timer started heater A timer started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed Pro ceed as follows 1 Press READ Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text Park heat timer 1 or 2 gt The text ON flashes on the display 3 Press RESET gt The text OFF is shown with a constant glow and the heater is switched OFF A timer started heater can be switched off in accordance with the instructions in the section Direct start and immediate stop see page 146 Clock timer The heater s time is connected to the car s clock
149. eans that the brake light flashes instead of as in normal braking shining with a constant glow Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds above 50 km h if the ABS system is working and or in the event of sudden braking After the car s speed has been slowed below 10 km h the brake light returns from flashing to the normal constant glow while at the same time the hazard warning flashers are activated and they flash until the driver changes engine speed with the accelerator pedal or they are deactivated with their button see page 85 Cleaning the brake discs Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs may result in delayed brake function This delay is minimised by cleaning the brake linings Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road sur faces prior to long stay parking and after the car has been washed Carry this out by braking gently during a short period while en route Emergency Brake Assistance Emergency Brake Assistance EBA Emergency Brake Assist helps to increase brake force and so reduce braking distance EBA detects the driver s braking style and increases brake force as necessary The brake force can be rein forced up to the level when the ABS system is engaged The EBA function is interrupted when the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced When EBA is activated the brake pedal low ers slightly more than usual depress hold the brake pedal as long as necessary If the brake pedal is released then
150. eat is blocked by an object If this happens go to key position I or 0 and wait a short time before adjusting the seat again Only one movement forward back up down can be made at a time Preparations The seats can be adjusted for a certain time after unlocking the door with the remote con 2 For key memory for keyless drive see page 54 trol key without the key in the ignition switch Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi tion land can always be made when the engine is running Seat with memory function G021134 Store setting Memory button Memory button Memory button O Button for storing settings 1 Adjust the seat and the door mirrors 3 Only if the car is equipped with power seat and retractable power door mirrors 2 Hold the button depressed to store set tings while depressing one of the memory buttons Using a stored setting Hold one of the memory buttons depressed until the seat and the door mirrors stop If you release the button then the movement of the seat will stop Key memory in remote control key The positions of the driver s seat and the door mirrors are stored in the key memory when the car is locked with the remote control key ur Go14387 When the car is unlocked with the same remote control key it was locked with and the driver s g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment O 03 17 Q 03 Your
151. eats The rear window wiper works again after a cool ing period 30 seconds or longer depending on the heat in the motor and the outside temperature i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD Wipers and washing 03 gt gt 93 D 03 Your driving environment Wipers and washing Wiper reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window wiping The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged If the rear window wiper is already on at con ue tinuous speed no change is made On cars with rain sensor the rear window wiper is activated with reversing if the sen sor is activated and it is raining 2 This function intermittent wiping when reversing can be deactivated Visit a workshop Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop COO ee 03 Your driving environment Windows rearview and door mirrors Heat reflecting windscreen windscreen with no heat reflecting film see the highlighted area in the above illustration Laminated glass Gh The glass is reinforced which pro i vides better protection against a break ins and improved sound insu lation in the passenger compartment 03 The windscreen and other windows have lami nated glass Water and dirt repellent coating D Windows are treated with a coating that improves the view in
152. eats and backrests that draw air through the seat upholstery The cooling effect increases the cooler the passenger compart ment air becomes The ventilation is regulated from the climate control and takes seat temperature solar radi ation and outside temperature into considera tion The ventilation can be used at the same time as seat heating For example the function can be used to dry damp from clothing The ventilation system can be activated when the engine is running There are three comfort levels that produce different cooling and dehu midification outputs e Comfort level Ill press the button once for maximum output three lamps illuminate e Comfort level Il press the button twice for lower output two lamps illuminate e Comfort level press the button three times for the lowest output one lamp illu minates Press the button four times to switch off the function no lamps illuminate The seat ventilation should be used carefully by people sensitive to draughts Comfort level is recommended for long term use IMPORTANT The seat ventilation cannot be started when passenger compartment temperature is below 5 C This is to avoid chilling anyone sitting in the seat Fan Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed If AUTO is selected then fan speed is regulated automatically The previously set fan speed is disengaged ig Option accesso
153. ecycled in an envi ronmentally sound manner Almost all of the car can be recycled The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a dealer for referral to a certified approved recycling facility The owner s manual and the environment The FSC symbol shows that the paper pulp in this publication comes from FSC certified for ests or other controlled sources Larttereltleiite s Volvo and the environment Mixed Sources Product group from well managed forests and other controlled sources www fsc org Cert no SW COC 001344 1996 Forest Stewardship Council h N Seatbelts ii Le eet ca PE TE 16 PAC ies A AA 19 Activating deactivating the airbag 22 Sioh o CENEL SE DANS 1 ist 24 Inflata Cr UC eee eee nen nen en ene 26 WEN A Magee Mee nitcr2ms sc senedentcswsrced ddecssdededeadveseeveriaens 27 Whemthe Systems deplo ss a a sf 29 Safe mode PRE en nee ea aa en tn 30 Child safety RSR re teach 31 14 Option accessory for more information see Introduction SA El x SAFETY 01 Safety 01 16 Seatbelts G020995 Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used Ensure that all passengers use their seatbelts It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection Do not lean the backrest too far back The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position Put
154. ed sensitivity The steering is firmer and more immediate on motorways Steering is light and requires no extra effort when parking and at low speed The driver can choose between three different levels of steering force for road responsiveness or steering sensitivity Go to Car settings gt Steering force level in the menu system and select Low Medium or High if Option accessory for more information see Introduction Operation LIT G021411 un s Steering wheel keypad and display Cruise control On Off 2 Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed 6 Standby mode Activate and adjust the speed O Selected speed in brackets Standby mode Activating and setting the speed Switch on the cruise control with one press on the steering wheel button CRUISE the sym bol is illuminated in the display 5 and the brackets around km h show that the cruise control is set in standby mode The cruise control is then activated with or after which the current speed is stored in the memory the display text km h changes to show the selected speed e g 100 km h NOTE Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 30 km h Changing the speed In active mode the speed is adjusted with long or short presses on or the last press is stored in the memory temporary increase in speed with the accel erator pedal e g du
155. el is close to the MIN mark start by topping up with 0 5 litres of oil Top up until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN on the dipstick 2 Only applies to diesel IMPORTANT Never fill above the MAX mark Oil con sumption may increase if too much oil is poured into the engine WARNING Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire Checking with a warm engine 1 Park the car on a level surface switch off the engine and wait 10 15 minutes to allow the oil time to run back to the sump Wipe the dipstick clean Check the oil level using the dipstick If the level is close to the MIN mark start by topping up with 0 5 litres of oil Top up until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN on the dipstick For engines with electronic dipstick The oil level is checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off see page 134 Engine compartment Checking the oil level 1 Switch the ignition to key position Il see page 107 The oil level is only updated by the system Turn the thumbwheel to position Engine oil level Wait gt The oil level in the engine is then shown during driving The system cannot detect changes when oil is filled or drained If engine oil is filled or drained then the car must be driven about 30 km before the oil level is measured correctly CS IS Engine oil level OK All normal Engine oil level Wa
156. elligent Driver Information Sys Ignition ROWS usa 74 IMEI NUMDEF s sucariarincadeantad pavos 213 MIMO INS E scesa 44 Indicator lamps PCC ccccscssicceserrsserseneses 46 Inflatable culta ss 26 Information and warning symbols 70 Information button PCC eee 46 Information displays 69 Instrument lighting see Lighting 82 Instrument overview left hand drive 66 right hand drive 68 Instruments and controls 66 Interior lighting see Lighting 86 Interior rearview mirror 98 automatic dimming 98 Intermittent wiping 92 iPod CONNECUON misorininii ciar 151 J JA A E EE AEO T E ree 247 09 Alphabetical Index a z 09 K bulbs specifications ccooccconcoo 268 Loading COMO Ss dim ue 86 cargo Arosa mc 224 Kerb WBIgNE se acaricia 293 display latin 1 82 JONA daras ns 224 KEY 44 front fog AMP nn 84 mounting DOME Sissi dau 225 headl e A 82 A a P A T 224 Key IAG Sanrio 47 AOS rn is emt home safe lightiNg coooooooomom 87 Lock confirmation 44 Keyless drive na era ayecaielvajane wera vereta eciarenals 53 107 in passenger compartment PEE 86 f l ve Locking unlocking Keyless start keyless drive 53 107 instrument lighting 82 ee 56 Keylock 114 m
157. en the adaptive cruise control is being used Accessories or other objects such as auxil iary lamps must not be installed in front of the grille Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system The driver must inter vene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles Nor for oncoming slow or stationary vehi cles and objects Do not use the adaptive cruise control for example in city traffic in dense traffic at junctions on slippery surfaces with a lot of water or slush on the road in heavy rain snow in poor visibility on winding roads or on slip roads The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehi cles in front is reduced significantly e if the radar sensor becomes blocked and cannot detect other vehicles e g in heavy rain or slush or if other objects have col lected in front of the radar sensor OKT Keep the surface in front of the radar sensor clean e if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi cantly different from your own speed Examples where the cruise control does not work optimally The radar sensor has a limited field of vision In some situations another vehicle is not detected or the detection is made later than expected F i 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04
158. engine mounting at the top the outer screw head O Check that the jump lead clamps are fixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting procedure Start the engine of the donor car Let the engine run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle 1500 rpm Start the engine of the car with the flat bat tery Do not touch the crocodile clips dur ing the start procedure There is a risk of sparks forming 11 Remove the jump leads first the black and then the red Make sure that none of the clamps on the black jump lead comes into contact with the battery s positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas which is highly explosive One spark which can be generated if you connect a jump lead incorrectly is sufficient to make the battery explode The battery contains sulphuric acid which can cause serious burns If the acid comes into contact with eyes skin or clothing flush with large quantities of water If acid splashes into the eyes seek medical attention immediately 03 Your driving environment O Starting the engine external battery 03 D 03 Your driving environment Gearboxes 03 3 2 Gearshift pattern 6 speed gearbox e Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change e Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes Reverse gear inhibitor The reverse gear inhibitor hinde
159. equired with the engine block heater At 20 C the heater should be used for approx 3 hours Cars intended for E85 have an electric engine block heater Starting and driving with a pre heated engine involves significantly lower emissions and reduced fuel consumption For this reason you should aim to use the engine block heater throughout the winter months WARNING The engine block heater is powered by high voltage Fault tracing and repair of an elec tric engine block heater and its electrical connections must only be carried out by a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Points to remember for carrying reserve fuel e Inthe event of stalling due to an empty fuel tank bioethanol E85 from a reserve fuel can may make the engine difficult to start in extreme cold This is avoided by filling the reserve fuel can with 95 octane petrol For more information on Flexifuel s bioethanol E 85 fuel see page 221 and 304 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD Starting the engine Flexifuel 03 gt gt 109 D 03 Your driving environment Starting the engine Flexifuel Fuel adaptation If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the car has been driven on bioethanol E85 or vice versa then the engine may run slightly unevenly for a time For this reason it is impor tant to allow the engine to accustom itself 03 adapt to th
160. er can also change gear manually using the Geartronic automatic gearbox The car engine brakes when the accelerator pedal is released Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving the lever to the side from position D to the end position at The information display shifts the indication from D to one of the figures 1 6 which is equivalent to the gear that is engaged just then see page 69 e Move the lever forwards towards plus to change up a gear and release the lever which returns to its rest position between and or e Pull the lever back towards minus to change down a gear and release it The manual gearshift mode can be selected at any time while driving Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver allows the speed to decrease lower than a level suitable for the selected gear in order to avoid jerking and stalling To return to automatic driving mode e Move the lever to the side to the end posi tion at D 1 Only models D5 and T6 f the gearbox has a Sport programme then the gearbox will only become manual after the lever has been moved forwards or back wards in its position The information display then shifts the indication from S to show which of the gears 1 6 is engaged Geartronic Sport mode S The Sport programme provides sportier cha racteristics and allows higher engine speed for the gears At the same time it responds more quickly to acceleration
161. er of cream with gentle circular movements on the leather 2 Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes before use The leather has now been given improved pro tection against stains and improved UV pro tection Washing instructions for the leather steering wheel e Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre mois tened sponge and neutral soap e Leather needs to breathe Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plas tic e Use natural oils Volvo s leather care agents are recommended for best results If the steering wheel has stains Group 1 ink wine coffee milk sweat and blood Use a soft cloth or sponge Mix a 5 ammonia solution For blood stains use a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt Group 2 fats oils sauces and chocolate 1 Same procedure as group l 2 Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth Group 3 dry dirt dust 1 Use a soft brush to remove the dirt 2 Same procedure as group l Treating stains on interior plastic metal and wood parts A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth lightly moistened with water available from Volvo dealers is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces Do not scrape or rub stains Never use strong stain removers A special cleaning agent avail able from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult cleaning Carpets and cargo area Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets Use a
162. er supply to the sunroof is switched off by removing the remote control key from the ignition switch WARNING If there are children in the car Remember to always switch off the power supply to the sunroof by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car Vertical opening Vertical opening raised at the rear edge ED Open by pressing the rear edge of the con trol upward Ed Close by pulling the rear edge of the con trol down i i 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD Power sunroof 03 gt gt 101 D 03 Your driving environment Power sunroof 03 102 Closing using the remote control key or central locking button re 3 A o o One long press on the lock button closes the sunroof and all the windows see pages 45 and 56 The doors and the tailgate are locked To interrupt closing press the lock button again WARNING If the sunroof is closed using the remote control key check that no one is in danger of becoming trapped in any way Sunscreen The sunroof features a manual sliding interior sunscreen The sunscreen slides back auto matically when the sunroof is opened Grip the handle and slide the screen forward to close it Pinch protection The sunroof s pinch protection function is trig gered if it is blocked by an object during auto matic closing If blocked the sunroof will stop
163. erage speed is calculated from the last resetting Reset using RESET Instantaneous Current fuel consumption is calculated every second The information on the display is updated every couple of seconds When the car is stationary appears on the display Average Average fuel consumption is calculated from the last resetting Reset using RESET 166 Option accessory for more information see Introduction There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel driven supplementary and or parking heater has been used Km to empty tank The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km and the remaining driveable fuel quantity The display shows the approximate distance that can be driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the tank An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance For more information on how you can influence fuel consumption see page 11 No guaranteed range remains when the display shows km to empty tank Refuel as soon as possible NOTE There may be a slight error in the reading if the driving style has been changed Resetting 1 Select km h average speed or 1 100km average Trip computer 2 Press and hold RESET for approx 1 second to reset the selected function If RESET is kept depressed for at least 3 three seconds then Average speed and Average are reset simultaneously Current speed The
164. ers which check and share information with each other on the car s function One or more of these computers may store informa tion on the systems they check during normal driving during the course of a collision or near collision Stored information may be used by e Volvo Car Corporation e Service or repair workshops e Police or other authorities O Other parties who claim legal entitlement for access to the information or someone who has permission from the owner to access the information Accessories and extra equipment The incorrect connection and installation of accessories can negatively affect the car s electrical system Certain accessories only function when their associated software is installed in the car s computer system Volvo therefore recommends that you always con tact an authorised Volvo workshop before installing accessories which are connected to or affect the electrical system Information on the Internet At www volvocars com there is further infor mation concerning your car Oa Volvo and the environment Volvo Cars environmental philosophy Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo ration s core values which influence all opera tions We also believe that our customers share our consideration for the environment Your Volvo complies with strict international environmental standards and is also manufac tured in one of the cleanest and most resource efficient plants
165. essure sensor and then the lamp for oil pressure is used Other variants have an oil level sensor and then the driver is informed via the warning symbol in the centre of the instrument unit as well as by display texts Cer tain models have both variants Contact a Volvo dealer for more information 1 Diesel engines have an electronic dipstick Dipstick and filler pipe diesel engine G021736 Change the engine oil in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet IMPORTANT When filling oil to top up the oil being filled must have the same grade see page 301 Checking the oil level in a new car is especially important before the first scheduled oil change The most accurate measurements are made on a cold engine before starting The measure ment will be inaccurate if taken immediately after the engine is switched off The dipstick will indicate that the level is too low because the oil has not had time to flow down into the oil sump 07 Maintenance and service N o N pil A o o The oil level must be within the area marked on the dipstick Park the car on a level surface switch off the engine and wait 10 15 minutes to allow the oil time to run back to the sump For capacities see page 301 and onwards Checking with a cold engine 1 2 Wipe the dipstick clean Check the level using the dipstick It must be between the MIN and MAX marks If the lev
166. est way to search in the phone book is with long presses on the keys 2 9 This starts a search in the phone book based on the key s first letter The phone book can also be reached with w A on the navigation button or with d Pl on the steering wheel keypad The search can also be performed from the phone book s Search menu under Phone book Search 1 Enter the first few letters of the contact and press ENTER or simply press ENTER 2 Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to call Voice recognition The mobile phone s voice recognition function for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Bluetooth handsfree twice for the second etc Continue pressing for Key Function si more characters see the following table AUTO Pressed briefly if two characters shall be entered after each other Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the voice recognition func A short press on EXIT deletes an input char tion Volvo recommends that you contact an acter One long press on EXIT clears all input authorised Volvo dealer or visit characters A W on the navigation button SIS www volvocars com for information on 3 compatible phones scrolls between the characters 0 amp Voice mail number Key Function SCAN Shift between upper and lower O Voice mail number can be changed under Call 1 Space 1 ASE options
167. et up the warning triangle see page 249 if a wheel must be replaced at a busy location The car and jack must be on a firm horizontal sur face 1 Apply the parking brake and engage reverse gear or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox If the car has full hubcaps then these should be removed WARNING Check that the jack is not damaged that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question which is indicated on the jack s label The label also indicates the jack s maximum lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting height Take out the spare wheel jack and wheel wrench that are located under the cargo area floor in the cargo area If another jack is selected see page 256 Remove any full hubcaps Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels which will remain on the ground Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones for example G034967 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 5 For cars with steel rims Prize off the wheel cover with the end of the wheel wrench or pull it off by hand 6 Loosen the wheel bolts 2 1 turn anticlock wise with the wheel wrench WARNING Never position anything between the ground and the jack nor between the jack and the car s jacking point 7 There are two jacking points on each side of the car There is a recess
168. ey if the driver leaves the car Operating Operating without auto Operating with auto All power windows can be operated using the control panel in the driver s door Each control panel in the other doors can only control its own respective power window The power win dows can only be controlled with one control panel at a time In order that the power windows can be used the remote control key must be in position I or Il After the car has been running the power windows can be operated for several minutes even when the remote control key has been removed but not however after the door has been opened Closing of the windows is stopped and the window is opened if anything prevents its movement It is possible to force the pinch pro tection when closing has been interrupted e g with ice by continuously holding the button up until the window is closed The pinch protec tion is reactivated after a brief pause One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly Operating without auto Move one of the controls up down gently The power windows move up down as long as the control is held in position Operating with auto Move one of the controls up down to the end position and release it The window runs auto matically to its end position Operating with the remote control key and central locking To remotely operate the power windows from
169. eye lets with straps or web lashings A loose object weighing 20 kg can in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km h carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compro mised or eliminated by high loads e Never load cargo above the backrest Always secure the load During heavy brak ing the load may otherwise shift causing injury to the car s occupants Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with something soft Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading unloading long items Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position and the car could then move off Front seat The passenger seat backrest can also be folded for an extra long load see page 76 Roof load Using load carriers To avoid damaging the car and for maximum possible safety while driving the load carriers designed by Volvo are recommended Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers e Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured Lash the load securely with retaining straps e Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers Put the heaviest objects at the bottom e The size of the area exposed to the wind and therefore fuel consumption increase with the size of the load e Drive gently Avoid quick acceleration heavy braking
170. f those in the car The purpose is to show their approximate appearance and location in the car The information that applies to your car in particular is available on the label in question in your car Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner s manual EN When there is a series of illustrations for step by step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corres ponding illustration There are numbered lists with letters adja cent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant El Arrows appear numbered and unnum bered and are used to illustrate a move ment If there is no series of illustrations for step by step instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers Position lists 1 Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different com ponents are pointed out The number recurs in the position list featured in con nection with the illustration that describes the item Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner s manual Example faligo iU eio p Important information e Coolant e Engine oil To be continued gt gt This symbol is located furthest down to the right when a section continues on the following page Recording data The driving and safety systems in the car use comput
171. f adverse conditions use ACEA A5 B5 SAE OW 30 Volume between MIN and MAX litres irs se i2 1 2 1 0 1 0 0 8 0 8 0 6 1 0 08 Specifications Volume incl oil filter litres DO 6 8 6 8 99 59 4 3 4 3 4 1 3 8 01 10 00 11 08 01 10 OO 11 08 08 Specifications Fluids and lubricants Other fluids and lubricants Manual gearbox Volume litres Prescribed transmission fluid MMT6 14 MTX75 1 8 BOT 350M3 M66 1 9 Automatic gearbox Volume litres Prescribed transmission fluid MPS6 T3 BOT 341 TF 80SC 7 0 Coolant 2 0 2 0F Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed SU ES 2S ee ne le ae with 50 water see the packaging D3 and D5 8 9 Brake fluid Brake system 0 6 DOT 4 Power steering fluid Power steering WSS M2C204 A2 or equivalent prod uct Washer fluid Cars with headlamp washing 605 Use a washer antifreeze recommended Cars without headlamp washing 4 5 by Volvo mixed with water 01 10 00 11 08 Specifications Fluids and lubricants Fuel Petrol engine approx 70 Petrol see page 220 Diesel engine approx 70 Diesel see page 221 A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285 1 Under normal driving conditions the gear box oil does not need to be changed during its service life However this may be nec essary under adverse driving conditions see page 302 08 01 10 OO 11 08 Specifications CO emissions and fuel consumption v70 SI CO CS of fo
172. f sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes skin or clothing flush with large quan tities of water If acid splashes into the eyes seek medical attention immediately 07 Maintenance and service 07 gt gt 07 Maintenance and service 07 The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly The life of the battery is affected by several factors including driving conditions and cli mate Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances Extreme cold further limits star ting capacity To maintain the battery in good condition at least 15 minutes of driving week is recom mended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life Changing Removal G040861 G040862 G040864 Switch off the ignition and wait for 5 minutes Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover Release the rubber moulding so that the rear cover is free Remove the rear cover by screwing one quarter turn and lifting it away 07 Maintenance and service WARNING Connect and disconnect the positive and negative cables in the correct sequence Ep Detach the black negative cable Secure the battery using the battery clamp Connect the venti
173. fferent directions are shown with English abbreviations N north NE north east E east SE south east S south SW south west W west and NW north west The compass is activated automatically when the car is started or in key position Il see page 74 To deactivate activate the compass press in the button on the rear side ofthe mirror using a paper clip for example Calibration The compass may need calibrating to work correctly C is shown in the mirror s display if the compass needs calibrating 1 Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high voltage power lines 2 Start the car For optimum calibration switch off all elec trical equipment climate control system wipers etc and make sure that all doors are closed 3 Press and hold the button on the rear of the rearview mirror use a paper clip or similar until C is shown again approx 6 seconds 4 Drive off as usual C disappears from the display when calibration is complete Alternative calibration method Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 8 km h until C disappears from the display when calibration is complete a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Selecting the zone Magnetic zones The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones The correct zone must be selected for the com pass to work correctly 1 The remote control key should be in posi tion ll
174. folded sepa restraint downwards see page 78 AE 2 The outer head restraints are lowered auto e The right hand section can only be folded matically when the outer backrests are together with the centre section lowered Pull up the backrest s locking e If the entire backrest is to be folded then handle EX while folding the backrest for the different sections should be folded ward at the same time A red indicator on separately the lock catch EJ shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 19 D 03 Your driving environment The remote control key must be in position lor Il L Press the button to lower the rear outer head restraints to improve rearward visi bility oa WARNING Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are any passengers using of the outer seats N Move the head restraint back manually until a click is heard WARNING The head restraints must be in locked posi tion after being raised 80 03 Your driving environment D Steering wheel Adjust and secure the steering wheel before driving With speed related power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted see page 170 03 G021138 Adjusting the steering wheel Lever releasing the steering wheel Horn Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal Y Possible steering wheel positions The steering wheel can be a
175. free Connect mobile phone A mobile phone is connected in different ways depending on whether or not it has been con nected previously To connect a mobile phone for the first time follow one of the sets of instructions below Alternative 1 via the car s menu system 1 Make the mobile phone detectable visible via Bluetooth see mobile phone manual 04 or www volvocars com 2 Activate the handsfree function with PHONE gt Menu option Add phone appears on the display If one or more mobile phones have already been registered then these are also shown 3 Select Add phone gt The audio system searches for mobile phones in the vicinity The search takes approximately 30 seconds The mobile phones detected are specified with their respective Bluetooth name in the dis play The handsfree function s Bluetooth name is shown in the mobile phone such as My Car 1 Only Keyless Drive 4 Choose one of the mobile phones in the audio system display 5 Enter the number series shown in the audio system display via the mobile phone key pad Alternative 2 via the phone s menu system 1 Activate the handsfree function with PHONE ff there is a phone connected disconnect the connected phone 2 Search with the phone s Bluetooth M see the mobile phone manual 3 Select My Car in the list of units detected in your mobile phone 4 Enter the PIN code 1234 into the mobile phone when prompted for the P
176. g lamps headlamp levelling and therefore do not have the thumbwheel Light switches e thumbwnee GH Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling Instrument lighting Different display and instrument lighting is switched on depending on key position see page 74 1 Not available for cars equipped with Xenon headlamps 82 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Lighting ee Specification 0 Automatic deactivated dipped beam Only main beam flash D 0 Position parking lamps D Dipped beam Main beam and main beam flash work in this position MM A Applies to certain markets Main beam can only be activated in position ZD aU Main beam flash Move the stalk switch gently towards the steer ing wheel to the position for main beam flash Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released Dipped beam When the engine is started dipped beam is activated automatically if the headlamp con trol is in position Ol If necessary auto matic dipped beam for this position can be 2 Applies to certain markets deactivated by a workshop Volvo recom mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop In position ZD dipped beam is always acti vated automatically when the engine is running or when the remote control key is in position Il Main beam Main beam can only be activated when the headlamp control is in position EN Acti vate deactivate main beam by moving the s
177. g pleasure 04 130 Menus and messages Some of the car s functions do not have sep arate function keys but instead can be adjusted activated deactivated via a menu system Navigation in the menus is carried out using some of the centre console buttons or with the steering wheel s right hand keypad Many functions are standard some are optional The range varies depending on mar ket Centre console controls ES G035669 I a a ru Centre console with information display and con trols for menus Numerical keypad 1 9 Navigation button scrolls and selects among menu options MENU leads to the menu system EXIT leads back one step in the menu structure A long press leads out from the menu system ENTER selects menu options Steering wheel keypad ENTER EXIT Navigation buttons up down If the steering wheel keypad has ENTER and EXIT then these buttons and the navigation buttons have the same functions as the con trols in the centre console ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction Search paths Current menu level is shown at the top right of the centre console display Search paths to the menu system functions are described in this manual in the following form Car settings gt Lock settings The following is an example of how a function can be accessed and adjusted using the centre console buttons 1 Press MENU 2 Scroll to the desire
178. g system right hand drive car The system consists of airbags and sensors sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag s are inflated with hot gas To cushion the impact the airbag deflates when compressed When this occurs smoke escapes into the car This is completely nor mal The entire process including inflation and deflation of the airbag occurs within tenths of a second Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious per sonal injury 01 Safety 9 01 gt gt Os 01 Safety 01 The car has an airbag to supplement the pro tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen ger side It is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts on the driver and passen ger side are used It is therefore possible that only one or none of the airbags may inflate in a colli sion The airbag system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accord ingly so that one or more airbags are deployed To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and The capacity of the airbags is also adapted SE E backs against the backrest Seatbelts must
179. gal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country Tread depth Road conditions with ice slush and low tem peratures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions Volvo there fore recommends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 millime tres Using snow chains Snow chains may only be used on the front wheels also applies to all wheel drive cars Never drive faster than 50 km h with snow chains Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres WARNING Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva lent chains designed for the car model and tyre and rim dimensions In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to your car and lead to an accident 06 Wheels and tyres Specifications R Radial ply Traffic regulations determine how fast a car The car has whole vehicle approval This ESS can be driven not the speed rating of the tyres means that certain combinations of wheels and 17 Rim diameter in inches ict approved ee the permissible com A eee NOTE MAMON SEE PAUE tyre load tyre load index LI It is the maximum permitted speed that is stated in the table ld E ri m collado fi fdi W Speed rating for maximum permitted Ab rims have a designation of dimen speed speed rating SS In this case sions for
180. gency equipment Driver Alert Control 191 e Emo oo A 84 warning triangle 249 Lane Departure Warning 194 Fog lamps see Messages and symbols 179 Emergency puncture repair o 950 9 y o 85 E MiB sisas bacan 200 Emissions of carbon dioxide 999 ae el Fog lamps O Oros paa 84 Engine Error messages in Distance Alert 182 FOOL Drake sra delata 118 overheating 231 Error messages in the Adaptive cruise con FOUR C Active chassis 170 UC Pe UE de ne 179 a 107 del FSC environmental labelling 12 Engine block heater 109 PR pe A E E E EE 220 a AP A 144 External dimensions 292 fuel CONSUMPTION rs 304 Engine braking automatic 120 fuel ECONOMIE 248 Engine compartment EEEE e E E Sn he 222 CODE senina aE 260 F FUSO OR id 274 CON Mo cena T 258 A 278 l A EE E A 140 AR A 297 PUSO eines 274 power steering fluid 261 Fault tracing for the camera sensor 187 E cceeccecesseseeseesseseeseee 281 Engine Oil A 257 300 First aid equipment 249 o A 274 adverse driving conditions 300 First aid kito ooo conc c cnc n cono nonnnnonononononons 249 done PE inerte incita 274 capacities E E A 300 e e 109 relay fuse box in engine compart eee EE E cosets 500 N 110 AA m_ _o o 279 OU GAG ro A e 204 Pulse table Engine specifications 298 a fuses in engine co
181. ger compartment air currents are also regis tered For this reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with a window or the sunroof open or if the passenger compartment heater is used To avoid this Close the window sunroof when leaving the car If the car s integrated passenger compartment heater or a porta ble electric heater shall be used direct the airflow from the air vents so that they are not pointing upwards in the passenger com partment Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm system components All such attempts could affect the terms of insurance Alarm indicator G021103 A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system s status e LED not lit Alarm not armed e The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed e The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm and until the remote control key is inserted in the ignition switch and key posi tion I is selected Alarm has been trig gered Arming the alarm Press the remote control key lock button Disarming the alarm Press the remote control key unlock but ton Deactivating a triggered alarm Press the remote control key unlock button or insert the remote control key in the igni tion switch Other alarm functions Automatic re arming of the alarm This function prevents the car being left with alarm disarmed unintentionally If the car is unlocked with the remote control key a
182. gh tempera tures may occur causing a risk of dam age cracks to the cylinder head For capacities and for standards regarding water quality see page 302 Check the coolant regularly The level must lie between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank If the system is not filled sufficiently high temperatures could occur causing a risk of damage to the engine WARNING Coolant can be very hot If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature unscrew the expan sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure Brake and clutch fluid Checking the level Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser voir The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir Check the level regularly Change the brake fluid every other year or at every other regular service For capacities and recommended fluid grade see page 302 The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard frequent braking such as driving in mountains or tropical climates with high humidity WARNING If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid Volvo rec ommends that the reason for the loss of brake fluid is investigated by an authorised Volvo workshop Filling The fluid reservoir is located on the driver s side The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover
183. gt Voice mail number If there is no 04 number stored then this menu can be reached 2 ABC2ZAAAAG with one long press on 1 Press 1 for along time ABC to use the stored number Se DEF3EE Call lists The call lists are copied to the handsfree func 4 GHI41 tion at each new connection and are then GHI updated during the connection Press ENTER 5 Ie to show the last dialled Other call lists are JKL available under Call register MNO NOTE Certain mobile phones show a list of the last PORS PORS7B dialled calls in reverse order TUV8UU 8 TUV Inputting text Input text using the keypad in the centre con rue WXYZ9 sole Press once for the key s first character MNO6G OOY gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 209 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 210 Built in phone General KE G040771 hi System overview Microphone SIM card reader Keypad see page 148 Control panel Privacy handset Safety Engage a workshop to perform the service via the phone Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work shop The built in phone must be switched off during refuelling or in the vicinity of blasting work IDIS limits the menu system depending on the speed of the car see page 212 Remember SIM card The phone can only be used with a valid SIM card Subscriber Identity Module For installa tion see page 213 Emergenc
184. hatch in the cargo area the box is protected by a cover 2 Open the rubber cover on the box Fit the payment card into the adapter Make sure that it is fitted correctly 4 Insert the adapter in the digital TV box Make sure that it is inserted correctly gt The system will detect that it has received new information 5 Search to find the new channels that have become available see the section Pay ment card TV channels below Payment card TV channels Search so that the system identifies the pay ment card s channels 1 Press MEDIA MENU on the remote con trol 2 Select Channel search Auto scan 3 Select country and press OK Formats supported by the digital TV box The TV system supports MPEG 2 transmis sions There is the option to receive MPEG 4 transmissions if you buy an adapter This adapter is inserted into the digital TV box and is fitted in the same way as the adapter for the payment card See the section Pay chan nels above Music Playing back a CD disc 1 Insert the CD with the label side turned from the buttons gt The disc starts to play back automati Cally 2 Switch on the wireless headphones select CH A for left hand screen or CH B for right hand screen gt The sound is directed to the head phones 3 Adjust the audio volume in the headphones using the volume control wheel on the headphones Alternatively activate the car s audio sys tem in MODE A
185. he door windows Other headlining along both sides of the roof and wise the intended protection of the inflat protects the car s occupants sitting in the outer able curtain which is concealed in the head seats A sufficiently violent collision trips the lining may be compromised sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the WARNIN driver and passengers from striking their heads S on the inside of the car during a collision The T curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts Always use a seatbelt COO The whiplash protection system WHIPS con sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe cially designed head restraints in the front seats The system is actuated by a rear end collision where the angle and speed of the col lision and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts Always use a seatbelt Properties of the seat When the WHIPS system is deployed the front seat backrests are lowered backward to alter the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger This reduces the risk of whiplash injury Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop WHIPS system and child seats booster cushions The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS s
186. he engine is switched off Scroll search forward and backward Short presses on 2 are used to scroll between CD tracks or preset radio stations A long press fast winds CD tracks or seeks the next availa ble radio station Limitations e The audio source FM AM CD etc played back in the speakers cannot be controlled from the rear control panel Audio functions G021402 Centre console controls for audio functions AM FM and CD internal audio sources MODE Scroll between external audio sources AUX USB and DAB1 DAB2 For connection via AUX or USB see page 151 SOUND Pushbutton and knob controls for adjusting the sound pattern Navigation button VOLUME Volume and On Off Audio volume and automatic volume control The audio system compensates for disrupting noises in the passenger compartment by increasing the volume with the speed of the i i 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 149 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Audio system NOTE car The level of compensation can be set at low medium or high Select the level under Audio settings Auto volume control External audio source audio volume The AUX input can be used for connecting an MP3 player which has no USB connection for example see page 151 04 The audio quality may be impaired if the player is charged while the audi
187. he event of snow ice or dirt on the windscreen for example e Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor Read about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 187 The system is disengaged e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 192 Option accessory for more information see Introduction The function is intended to reduce the risk for single vehicle accidents accidents where in certain situations the vehicle leaves the car riageway and is in danger of driving either into a ditch or into oncoming traffic LDW consists of a camera that detects the side markings painted on the carriageway The driver is alerted by an acoustic signal if the vehicle crosses a side marking The function is switched on or off by means of a switch on the centre console An indicator lamp in the button illuminates when the func tion is switched on The trip computer display shows Lane Depart Warn Unavailable when the function is in standby mode The LDW function is activated automatically from standby mode after the camera has scan ned in the carriageway s side markings and speed exceeds 65 km h The trip computer display then shows Lane Depart Warn Available 1 A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected see page 195 Driver Alert System LDW If the camera can no longer detect the carria geway s side markings or if speed
188. he steering wheel button and decreased using el Atlow speed when the distances are short the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary noticeably in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 175 EN 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 176 Adaptive cruise control Note that a short time interval gives the driver a short time to react and act if something unex pected happens in the traffic The number of lines for the selected time interval is shown during the setting itself and for several seconds after N wards Then a smaller scale version of the symbol is shown to the right of the dis play The same symbol is also shown when Distance Alert is activated see page 181 123456 Only use the time interval that is allowed in accordance with local traffic regulations If cruise control does not seem to react to activation the reason may be that the time interval to the closest vehicle prevents an increase in speed The higher the speed the longer the calcu lated distance in metres for a specific time interval Temporary deactivation standby mode Press the steering wheel button 0 to tempo rarily disengage the cruise control and set it
189. here may not be any warning issued for the driver For this reason it is always important to stop and take a break in the event of any signs of driver fatigue irrespective of whether or not DAC issues a warning The function must not be used to extend a driving stint Always plan breaks at regular intervals and ensure that you are fully rested Limitation In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating for example e if the driver tests the LDW function e in strong side winds e onrutted road surfaces Some settings are made from the centre con sole display and its menu system For informa tion on how the menu system is used see page 130 The current status can be checked on the trip computer display with the left hand stalk switch Thumbwheel Turn until the display shows Driver Alert The second row displays the Off U navailable or Level mark options READ confirms or clears a warning in the memory Activating Driver Alert Control Using the centre console display with its menu system search and locate Car settings gt If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal as well as the text message Driver Alert Time for a break The warning is repeated after a time if driving ability does not improve An alarm should be taken very seriously as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his her own condition 04
190. hild Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 04192 Rear facing child seat Child Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 03135 Britax Fixway rear facing child seat secured with the ISOFIX fixture system and straps Type approval E5 03171 Child seats which are universally approved Rear facing child seat Child Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 03135 Child seats which are universally approved Group 2 15 25 kg Group 2 3 15 36 kg Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible Child Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 04192 Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible Child Seat front facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt Type approval E5 04191 Volvo booster seat with backrest Volvo Booster Seat with backrest Type approval E1 04301169 Booster cushion with and without backrest Booster Cushion with and without backrest Type approval E5 03139 bag Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible Child Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 04192 Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible Child Seat front facing ch
191. horised Volvo workshop is recommended a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Distance Alert Distance Alert is a function that informs the driver about the time interval to vehicles in front Distance alert is active at speeds above 30 km h and only reacts to vehicles driving in front of the car in the same direction No dis tance information is provided for oncoming slow or stationary vehicles A small section of the red warning lamp in the windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time interval Distance Alert only reacts if the distance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value the speed of the driver s vehicle is not affected Press the button in the centre console to switch the function on or off The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the button Set time interval DIR Controls and display E Time interval Increase decrease 6 Time interval On during adjustment Time interval On after adjustment Time intervals are increased using and decreased using Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the display as 1 5 horizontal lines the more lines the longer the time distance One line corre sponds to approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front 5 lines approx imately 2 5 seconds
192. houlder see preced Correct position the seatbelt is positioned above ing illustrations the shoulder e the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned Pull the handle forward and up in order to 4 low over the pelvis to provide optimal pro release the booster cushion tection Weight 22 36 kg 15 25 kg G017696 Length 115 140 cm 95 120 cm For instructions on adjusting the booster cush ion s two levels see pages 36 37 G017697 correct Sion the head must not be posi tioned above the head restraint and the seatbelt must not be below the shoulder 36 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 01 Safety 9 hile safety o Press the booster cushion backwards to PA Lift the booster cushion up at the frontedge the booster cushion from the upper stage to lock and press it back against the backrest to lock the lower stage Volvo recommends that repair or replace ment is only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop Do not make any modifi cations or additions to the booster cushion If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load such as in con junction with a collision the entire booster cushion must be replaced Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged it may not afford the same level of protec tion The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn G017692 G017783 Pull the handle forwards to release the Start from the l
193. icalON Susanna 233 eering force speed related A Lane Departure Warning 194 TOWING eye 238 Steering force level see Steering force 170 Symbols and messages in the Adaptive ANSE rie 231 Stering A 108 cruise control 179 Ee erteg ceec ace a stb esiaes ct cea 23 driving with a trailer 231 TransmiSSION 2 2 112 Transponder 2 uma 95 THI COMMUN GI a 166 ld e cineca MA 73 Type approval remote control key sys SR P e 314 Type de NON cesante 290 Tyres dimensions 308 direction of rotatiON iocincisaras 242 driving characteristics 242 Manten and miurnicionta nario cdo 242 Pres usais 248 308 puncture ED A snririnnnacoa dieras 250 Specific MON Sica 245 308 speed FANS ne 245 tread wear indicators 243 winter AVES season 244 Unlocking from the inside 56 from the outside 56 USB CONMNECtiON ooccocccnccncncnnnnnncnncnanananono 151 V E MIO 2 86 204 Venta O omar 138 Vibration dAMPEF seins 232 W Warning lamp adaptive cruise control 173 collision warning system 184 stability and traction control system 168 Warning lamps airbags SAO A imnitiis 71 alternator not charging 71 fault in brake system 71 low oil pressure 71 parking brake applied 71 seatbelt reminder ra WARIO a A 71 Warning sound collision warning system 184 Warning symbol
194. ight rear O Centre console under the rear section Centre console under the front section WARNING People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless system s antennae with their pacemaker This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system 02 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 55 02 Locks and alarm 02 56 Locking unlocking From the outside The remote control key can lock unlock all doors and the tailgate simultaneously Different sequences for unlocking can be selected see Unlocking with the remote control key page 45 If it is not possible to lock unlock with the remote control key the battery may be dis charged lock or unlock the driver s door with the detachable key blade see page 47 WARNING Be aware that there is a risk that you can be locked in the car if it is locked from the out side Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking all are locked again automatically This function reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally For cars with alarm see page 62 From the inside Central locking Central locking All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked or unlocked simultaneously using the central locking button on either front door e Press one side of the button to lock the other side to unlock U
195. ignals The handsfree function has integrated ring sig nals that can be selected under Phone settings Sounds and volume Ring signals gt Ring signal 1 etc The connected mobile phone s ring signal is not deactivated when one of the handsfree system s integrated signals is used In order to select the connected phone s ring signal go to Phone settings gt Sounds and volume Ring signals Use mobile phone signal 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 207 EN 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 208 Bluetooth handsfree More on registering and connecting A maximum of five mobile phones can be reg istered Registration is performed once per phone After registration the phone no longer needs to be visible detectable A maximum of one mobile phone can be connected at a time Phones can be deregistered under Bluetooth Remove phone Automatic connection When the handsfree function is active and the last mobile phone connected is in range it is connected automatically When the audio sys tem searches for the last phone connected its name is shown in the display To change over to manual connection of another phone press EXIT Manual connection If you want to connect a mobile phone other than the last connected or change the con nected mobile phone proceed as follows 1 Set the audio system in phone mode 2
196. ild seat secured with the car s seatbelt Type approval E5 04191 Volvo booster seat with backrest Volvo Booster Seat with backrest Type approval E1 04301169 Booster cushion with and without backrest Booster Cushion with and without backrest Type approval E5 03139 Integrated booster cushion Integrated Booster Cushion available as a fac tory fitted option Type approval E5 03168 01 Safety 01 Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible Child Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 04192 Volvo booster seat with backrest Volvo Booster Seat with backrest Type approval E1 04301169 Booster cushion with and without backrest Booster Cushion with and without backrest Type approval E5 03139 gt gt A S 01 Safety o1 Child safety o Integrated two stage booster The booster cushions are specially designed to Raising the two stage booster cushion cushions provide optimum safety In combination with 7 the seatbelt they are approved for children who weigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are 95 to 140 cm in height Stage 1 Check before driving that e the 2 stage integrated booster cushion is correctly set See table below and in locked position e the seatbelt is in contact with the child s body and is not slack or twisted e the seatbelt does not lie across the child s S throat or below the s
197. in standby mode set speed is shown in brackets in the display e g 100 Standby mode due to driver intervention Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if e the foot brake is used e the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than 1 minute e the gear selector is moved to neutral posi tion automatic gearbox e the driver maintains a speed higher than the set speed for longer than 1 minute The driver must then regulate the speed A temporary increase in speed with the accel erator pedal e g during overtaking does not affect the cruise control setting the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released Automatic standby mode The adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems such as Stability and traction control DSTC If any of these systems stop working then cruise control is automatically deactivated In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and the message Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the display The driver must then intervene and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead 1 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode i Option accessory for more information see Introduction An automatic deactivation can be due to e engine speed is too low high speed falls below 30 km h wheels lose traction brake temperature is high the radar sensor is covered e g by wet
198. in Auto mode and Auto appears on the display The automatically stored presets can now be selected using the preset buttons Automatic preset storage can be cancelled using EXIT Auto mode is cancelled by pressing for exam ple AUTO or FM Returning to Auto mode provides access to the autostored presets 1 Press AUTO gt Auto appears on the display 2 Press a preset button Scan wavelength The function automatically searches the cur rent wavelength for strong stations When a station is found it is played for approx 8 sec onds before scanning is resumed 1 Select wavelength using AM or FM 2 Press SCAN SCAN appears on the display Close using SCAN or EXIT RDS functions RDS Radio Data System links FM transmitters into a network An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions e Automatically switches to a stronger trans mitter if reception in the area is poor e Searches for programme type such as traffic information or news e Receives text information on current radio programme NOTE Some radio stations do not use RDS or only some if its functionality If a required programme type is located the radio can switch stations interrupting the audio source currently in use For example if the CD player is in use it is paused The interrupting transmission is played at a preset volume see page 157 The radio returns to the previous aud
199. in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral Message texts There are displays in the car that show text messages These text messages are high lighted in the owner s manual by means of the text being slightly larger and printed in grey Examples of this are in menu texts and mes sage texts on the information display e g Audio settings Decals The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner The decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning information Warning for personal injury A G031590 Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field white text image on black message field Used to indicate the presence of danger which if the i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Introduction Important information warning is ignored may result in serious per sonal injury or fatality Risk of property damage Q A D ire lt co o Oo White ISO symbols and white text image on black or blue warning field and message field Used to indicate the presence of danger which if the warning is ignored may result in damage to property Information N o ire co o Oo White ISO symbols and white text image on black message field AE DA AR The labels shown in the owner s manual are not provided as exact reproductions o
200. in the car Arm the alarm see page 62 Wait 15 seconds Trigger the alarm by moving your arms for ward and back at backrest height gt A siren sounds and all direction indica tors flash Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key Testing the alarm sensors in the doors 1 2 3 Arm the alarm see page 62 Wait 15 seconds Unlock the driver s door using the key blade Open the driver s door gt A siren sounds and all direction indica tors flash Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key Testing the alarm sensors for the bonnet 1 Sit in the car and deactivate the movement sensor see the previous section Reduced alarm level Arm the alarm see page 62 Remain in the car and lock the doors with the button on the remote control key Wait 15 seconds Open the bonnet with the handle under the dashboard gt A siren sounds and all direction indica tors flash Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm 02 63 a o Pu a 74 USE LES e e n Saedlenwiondaahbntenmenonsnmautanuuiawinmnscdeest 76 Steering Whl oocccconnnicocccncococncnonoconononnnconnnnnonannconnnnnnonannnonannrnnnnnarenananss 81 A a 0 a 82 WIpers ana MASON ennemies 92 Windows rearview and door MIIOMS ccccceccececeececeeceeeuceceusuueuseeeuseuans
201. in the world Volvo Car Corpo ration has global ISO certification which includes the environmental standard ISO 14001 covering all factories and several of our other units We also set requirements for our partners so that they work systematically with environmental issues fuel consumption Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emis sion of the greenhouse gas carbon dioxide It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con sumption For more information read under the heading Reducing environmental impact Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the con cept Clean inside and out a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control In many Cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust and pollen from entering the passenger com partment via the air intake A sophisticated air quality system lAQS Inte rior Air Quality System ensures that the incom ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out side The system consists of an electronic sensor and a carbon filter The incoming air is moni tored continuously and if there is an increase in A Option accessory for more information see Introduction Introduction 11 Int
202. ing it and pressing ENTER Then scroll to Erase and press ENTER Erase all contacts under Phone book Erase SIM or Erase phone Copying entries between the SIM card and the phone book Go to Phone book gt Copy all gt SIM to phone or Phone to SIM and press ENTER Voice mail number See page 209 Other functions and settings IDIS IDIS Intelligent Driver Information System can in active driving situations delay or refuse ring signals from incoming calls This way less attention is distracted from driving IDIS is deactivated under Phone settings gt IDIS Reading messages 1 Scroll to Messages Read and press ENTER Scroll to a message and press ENTER The message text is shown in the display Additional selections can be made by pressing ENTER Writing and sending messages 1 Scroll to Messages Write new and press ENTER 2 Enter text and press ENTER For informa tion on text input see page 209 Scroll to Send and press ENTER Enter a phone number and press ENTER Message settings Message settings are not normally changed The network provider has further information on these settings There are three options under Messages Message settings e SMSC number Specifies the message centre which will transfer the messages e Validity time Specifies how long the message will be stored in the message centre e Message type Call lists Lists of received dialled and missed calls a
203. ing the windscreen The wind screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating Service position wiper blade For cleaning the windscreen wiper blades and replacement of wiper blades see see page 269 and 282 Rain sensor The rain sensor automatically starts the wind screen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen The sensitivity of 1 Replacing the wiper blades see page 269 service position wiper blade see page 269 and filling washer fluid see page 270 e Option accessory for more information see Introduction the rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumbwheel When the rain sensor is activated a light in the button the rain sensor symbol is shown in the right hand display in the combined instrument panel Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor the car must be running or the remote control key in position I or Il while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button The windscreen wipers make one sweep Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make an extra sweep Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi tivity and downward for lower sensitivity An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward Deactivating Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but ton or move the stalk switch down to another wiper program
204. ing time limit Main menu CD Seat amp mirror positions Seat heating off during starting Random Car settings Reset climate settings Off Information Main menu AM Folder Light settings Audio settings Disc Lock settings Sound stage Single disc Reduced guard Equalizer front All discs Tyre pressure Equalizer rear CD settings Side mirror settings Auto volume control Track niomat 1 Available in certain models 2 For submenus see Main menu AM Audio settings 3 See page 158 4 Only in systems that allow the playback of MP3 and WMA format audio files 5 Only in systems with CD changer gt gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 131 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 132 Menus and messages News TP Traffic information Audio settings Main menu AUX AUX input volume Audio settings Main menu USB USB settings Track information News TP Traffic information Audio settings Main menu iPod iPod settings News TP Traffic information Audio settings Track information 2 For submenus see Main menu AM Audio settings 6 Applies to cars that do not have built in phone 7 Only shown if a phone is connected 8 Only shown if no phone is connected 9 Applies to cars with built in phone and Bluetooth handsfree 10Only shown if no phone is connected i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Main menu Bluetooth Call regis
205. instrument panel display shows current speed in mph if the speedometer is graduated in km h If the speedometer is graduated in mph then the current speed is shown in km h 1 Only certain markets 04 Comfort and driving pleasure D Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 167 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 DSTC Stability and traction control system General information on DSTC The stability and traction control system DSTC Dynamic Stability and Traction Control helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car s traction The activation of the system during braking may be noticed as a throbbing sound The car may accelerate slower than expected when the accelerator pedal is depressed Active Yaw Control The function limits the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car Spin Control The function prevents the driving wheels from spinning against the road surface during accel eration Traction control system The function is active at low speed and trans fers power from the driving wheel that is spin ning to the one that is not Operation Reduced operation System operation during skidding and accel eration can be reduced Operation during skid ding is delayed and so allows more skidding which provides greater freedom for dynamic driving Traction in deep snow or sand is improved as traction is no longer limited Wa
206. io source and volume when the set pro gramme type is no longer broadcast The programme functions alarm ALARM traffic information TP Traffic information news News and programme types PTY Program type interrupt one another in order of priority where alarm has the highest priority and programme types has the lowest For fur ther programme interruption settings EON and Regional see page 157 Press EXIT to return to the interrupted audio source 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 Audio system Alarm This function is used to warn of serious acci dents and catastrophes The alarm cannot be temporarily interrupted or deactivated The message ALARM appears on the display when an alarm message is transmitted Traffic information TP This function allows traffic information sent within a set station s RDS network to break through The TP Traffic information symbol indicates that the function is activated If the set station can send traffic information then appears on the display Activate deactivate under FM settings gt TP Traffic information TP from current station all stations The radio can interrupt with traffic information from only the set current station or from all stations Go to FM settings Advanced radio settings gt TP Station to change News This function allows news broadcasts sent within a set statio
207. ion see Introduction 05 During your journey 05 231 05 05 During your journey Driving with a trailer Diesel engine 5 cyl e Inthe event of a risk of overheating the optimal speed for the engine is 2300 3000 rem for optimal circulation of the coolant Automatic gearbox Overheating When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating e Anautomatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine speed e Inthe event of overheating a warning sym bol illuminates on the instrument panel combined with a text message follow the recommendation given Steep inclines e Do not lock the automatic transmission in a higher gear than the engine can cope with it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine revolutions IMPORTANT See also the specific information on slow driving with trailer for cars with the Powershift automatic transmission on page Wise Parking on a hill 1 Depress the foot brake Activate the parking brake Move the gear selector to position P Release the foot brake pri Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer Always use the parking brake e Block the wheels with chocks when park ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill Starting on a hill 1 Depress the foot brake 2 Move the gear selector to driving posi tion D Release
208. ion accessory for more information see Introduction 08 gt gt 315 08 Specifications Symbols in the display Left hand direction indicators Right hand direction indicators Sym Page bol 70 70 Other information symbols in the combined instrument panel La 08 316 La Adaptive cruise con trol Adaptive cruise con trol Adaptive cruise con trol Distance Alert Adaptive cruise con trol Distance Alert Adaptive cruise con trol Adaptive cruise con trol Distance Alert Sym Page bol Tele es 19 179 179 182 179 182 179 175 181 Sym bol TU w A Ul non d e o i E E N NF on at LD LD 7 lt a A Q Option accessory for more information see Introduction 23456 Adaptive cruise con trol Distance Alert Adaptive cruise con trol Radar sensor Camera sensor Laser sensor Auto Brake Dis tance Alert Collision warning system Fuel driven engine block heater and passenger compart ment heater ABL system A 17 5 181 175 179 188 188 191 194 182 188 145 83 bol TA OEE nl 219 Fuel filler flap right hand side Low battery Parking brake Rain sensor Driver Alert System Driver Alert System Lane Departure Warning Driver Alert System Lane Departure Warning Dri
209. iption of the menu system see page 130 For headlamp pattern adjustment see page 87 3 Activated on delivery from the factory sa lamps Turn the headlamp control to the centre posi tion number plate lighting comes on at the same time Rear position lamps also come on when the tailgate is opened in order to alert anybody behind Headlamp control in position for position parking The brake light automatically comes on during braking For information on the Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers see page 118 Button for front fog lamps The front fog lamps can be switched on along with main dipped beam or position parking lamps The front fog lamps can be switched on along with main dipped beam or position parking lamps Press the button for on off The light in the but ton illuminates when the fog lamps are on OKT Regulations for using front fog lamps vary between different countries Rear fog lamp o Y m A o Ko Button for rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp and can only be switched on in combination with main dipped beam or the front fog lamps Press the button for On Off The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the combined instrument panel and the light in the button illu minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when the engine is switched off NOTE Regulati
210. is below 2 C The car can be started once the symbol goes out Low level in fuel tank When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel tank is low refuel as soon as possible Information read display text When one of the car s systems does not behave as intended this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the informa tion display The message text is cleared with the READ button see page 134 or it disap pears automatically after a time time depend ing on which function is indicated The infor mation symbol can also illuminate in conjunc tion with other symbols When a service message is shown the sym bol and message are cleared using the READ button or clear automatically after a while Main beam On The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash Left right hand direction indicators Both direction indicator symbols flash when the hazard warning flashers are used Indicator and warning symbols Specification Symbol Low oil pressure Parking brake applied Airbags SRS Seatbelt reminder Alternator not charging 03 Your driving environment EN Instruments and controls 03 gt gt A 7 D 03 Your driving environment 03 ee Instruments and controls Symbol Specification Fault in brake system CA Warning A For certain engine variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used Warnings are made via display text
211. is located in the roof console and the combined instrument panel Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions e Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat message appears in the information display when the seatbelts are in use or if one of the rear doors has been opened The message is cleared automatically after driving for approximately 30 seconds or after press ing the indicator stalk s READ button e Provides a warning if one of the rear seat belts is unfastened during travel This warning takes the form of a message on the information display along with the audio visual signal The warning stops when the seatbelt is re fastened or it can also be acknowledged manually by press ing the READ button The message on the information display show ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail able Press the READ button to see stored messages 01 Safety 9 01 ad yy S 01 Safety o Certain markets An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind the driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one At low speed the audio reminder will sound for the first 6 seconds Seatbelt tensioner All the seatbelts are equipped with belt ten sioners A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a suffi ciently violent collision
212. it System initialised shown for about 2 seconds 07 gt gt 07 Maintenance and service Engine compartment message RE Engine oil level Fill Fill with engine oil 1 litre oil Engine oil level Shown when the Service required system has detected something that needs to be rec tified in order to ena ble the correct infor mation regarding oil volume to be shown Coolant Checking and topping up the coolant a 07 When topping up the coolant follow the instructions on the packaging It is important that the mixture of coolant concentrate and water is correct for the prevailing weather con ditions Never top up with water only The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate For capacities see page 302 IMPORTANT e A high content of chlorine chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system e Always use coolant with anti corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo e Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50 water and 50 coolant e Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water In the event of any doubt about water quality used ready mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec ommendations e When changing coolant replacing cool ing system components flush the cool ing system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready mixed coolant e The engine must only be run with a well filled cooling system Hi
213. key but keep it in a safe place instead e Deactivation takes place in reverse order For information on locking the glovebox only see page 5 50 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm Battery replacement remote control key PCC Replacing the battery The batteries should be replaced if Battery replacement Closely study how the battery batteries are e theinf ti bolie iliumnnatedand secured on the inside of the cover with 02 the information symbol is illuminated an regard to their and sides the display shows Replace car key battery Remove control key 1 battery and or 1 Carefully prize out the battery e the locks repeatedly do not react to signals E AO ca wey ORNE from the remote control key within PCC 2 batteries 20 metres from the car i 1 Carefully prize out the batteries Openmg 2 First install one new one with the side a D gt Slide the spring loaded catch to the up Sue 3 Position the white plastic tab in between 23 At the same time pull the key blade and finally install a second new battery with straight out backwards the side down El E gt Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the Battery type hole behind the spring loaded catch and Use batteries with the designation CR2430 3V 3 gently prize the remote control key up one in the remote control key and two in the PCC Assembly Turn the remote control key over with the 1 Pres
214. kidding to one side resulting in pos sible complete loss of control over the car This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging up and not standing up WARNING A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control of the car Tyres with tread wear indicators Tread wear indicators Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless bands across the width of the tread On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI Tread Wear Indicator When the tyre s tread depth is down to 1 6 mm the tread depth will be level in height with the tread wear indicators Change to new tyres as soon as possible Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow Rims and wheel bolts IMPORTANT The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm Overtightening can damage the nuts and the bolts Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso ries Check the torque with a torque wrench Locking wheel bolts Locking wheel bolts can be used on both alu minium and steel rims Under the cargo area floor there is space for the sleeve for the lock able wheel bolts G043840 Located under the cargo area floor are the car s towing eye jack and wheel wrench There is also space for the sleeve for the lock able wheel bolts Jack The jack s thread must always be well greased Op
215. lation hose Connect the red positive cable Connect the black negative cable Press in the rear cover See Removal DES ON A e Reinstall the rubber moulding See FD Detach the red positive cable Removal 9 Reinstall the front cover and secure it with E Detach the ventilation hose from the bat the clips See Removal tery EX Loosen the screw holding the battery clamp Move the battery to the side and lift it up Installation 07 o e t fo GS 1 Lower the battery into the battery box 2 Move the battery inward and to the side until it reaches the rear edge of the box 07 Maintenance and service General Location fuse boxes All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to pro tect the car s electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading If an electrical component or function does not work it may be because the component s fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for checking o re a S re Changing e OI CIS Fuse box locations in a left hand drive car In a 2 Pull out the fuse and check from the side right hand drive car the fuse box under the glo to see whether the curved wire has blown vebox changes sides 3 Ifthis is the case replace it with a new fuse
216. level must be inspected Cold weather pla ces great demands on the battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold e Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec ommends using winter tyres on all four wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice 05 The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries Slippery driving conditions Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts 05 During your journey Refuelling Refuelling Opening closing the fuel filler flap o N CA 3 Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the lighting panel the flap opens when the button is released The filler flap is located on the right hand rear wing as indicated by the information display s arrow by the symbol Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until a click confirms that it is closed Opening the fuel filler flap manually o em o y A o The fuel filler flap can be opened manually when electric opening from the passenger compartment is not possible 1 Open remove the side hatch in the cargo area same side as fuel filler flap and locate the green cord with handle 2 Pull the cord gently straight back until the fuel filler flap folds out with a click IMPORTANT Pull the wire gently minimal f
217. locked posi tion Remove the key from the lock Y A o 0 Ensure that the mechanism is in the unlocked position by turning the key clock wise 05 During your journey Driving with a trailer G021494 G021495 Check that the towbar is secure by pulling it up down and back WARNING If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions EJ Safety cable WARNING Be sure to attach the trailer s safety cable to the correct place IMPORTANT OS the towbar i lt EN ha j Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch i the remainder of the towbar should be clean and dry o Y ps A S GS EN Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the unlocked position G021497 Push in the locking wheel amp and turn it anticlockwise gt until you hear a click 05 Turn the locking wheel down fully until it comes to a stop Hold it in this position while pulling the towbar rearward and upward WARNING Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the car see page 233 gt gt 05 During your journey Driving with a trailer a Push the protective cover until it snaps tight 05 During your journey Towing Find out the highest legal speed for towing before towing the car 1 Press the remote control key into the igni tion switch to unlock the steering lock so that the car can be steered
218. m can sit in the front passenger seat but never children in a child seat or on a booster cushion EJ The airbag is deactivated With the switch in this position children in a child seat or on a booster cushion can sit in the front passenger seat but never persons taller than 140 cm a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 01 Safety 9 Activating deactivating the airbag 01 WARNING Activated airbag passenger seat Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm Deactivated airbag passenger seat No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger life Messages PASSENGER Rje AIRBAG OFF Y2 G017724 Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated A text message and a symbol in the roof panel indicate that the airbag for the front passenger When the remote control key is turned to key position Il or Ill the warning symbol for the airbag is displayed on the combined instrument panel for approx 6 seconds see page 19 seat is deactivated See preceding illustration Te Following which the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag For more information
219. metimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy nals road surface The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains Wait It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer blocked 04 Symbols and messages in the display Standby mode or active mode without detected vehicle Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed Time interval activated during adjustment AN Time interval activated after adjustment Turn on DSTC to enable Cruise control cannot be activated until the stability and traction control function DSTC has been set Cruise in Normal mode Cruise control Cancelled The cruise control has been deactivated the driver has to regulate the speed gt gt e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 179 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 180 Adaptive cruise control Cruise control Unavailable Radar blocked See manual Cruise control Service required Cruise control cannot be activated This could be due to e brake temperature is high e the radar sensor is blocked by e g wet snow or rain Cruise control temporarily disengaged e The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles For example in the event that heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 177 Cruise control not working e Contacta workshop an aut
220. mission see page 115 General Air conditioning The car is equipped with Electronic Climate Control ECC The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment The air conditioning system AC can be switched off but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compart mentand to preventthe windows from mist ing it should always be on Actual temperature The temperature you select corresponds to the physical experience with reference to factors such as air speed humidity and solar radiation etc in and around the car The system includes a sun sensor which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passenger compartment This means that the temperature can differ between the right and left hand air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides Sensor location e The sun sensor is located on the top side of the dashboard e The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is located below the climate control panel e The outside temperature sensor is located on the door mirror e The humidity sensor is located in the inte rior rearview mirror NOTE Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects Side windows and sunroof To ensure that the air conditioning works opti mally the side windows and sunroof if appro priate should be closed Misting windows Remove
221. mitter is far away even if there is a lot of static e Off no interruption for programmes from other transmitters Resetting RDS functions All radio settings can be reset to the original factory settings The reset is carried out in FM mode under FM settings Advanced radio settings gt Reset all Volume control programme types The interrupting programme types e g NEWS or TP are heard at the volume selected for each respective programme type If the vol ume level is adjusted during the programme interruption the new level is saved until the next programme interruption 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Main menu FM FM settings News TP Traffic information Radio text PTY Program type 1 4 1 Select PTY Clear all PTY Current affairs Information Sport Education Drama Culture Science Varied speech Pop music Rock music Easy listening Light classic 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Menu structure FM 04 gt gt EN 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 158 Audio system Classical Other music Weather amp metro Finance Children s programs Social affairs Religion Phone in Travel amp touring Leisure amp hobby Jazz music Country music National music Oldies music Folk music Documentary 1 4 2 Search PTY 1 43 Show PTY text 1 5 Advanced radio settings 1 5 1 TP station 6 Not all areas countries use both wavelengths 1 5 2 News station 1 5 3 AF 1 5 4 EON Off Loc
222. mpartment 276 Fuld CAD ACIICS sn cs 302 Environmental labelling FSC owner s A mies E E T T 12 ie cde eii 302 FM menu structure 157 az 09 Alphabetical Index 09 6 o NET 112 AUTOMATE arar 112 o A 112 Gear selector inhibitor 114 Gear selector inhibitor mechanical disen ero A non 114 COE ONIC iden nicdacaniiesounateanncewacsieesdendseaesdes 113 Glass laminated reinforced 95 ClIOVEDO Cassandra 203 Ll N ea EE 57 Gross vehicle weight 293 Hazard warning flashers 85 DE o eo 120 Headlamp levelling 82 Headlamp pattern adjustino 87 Headlamp pattern adjustment Active Bending Lights coo o 88 HeadlaDS sunno cinsaasico 263 Headphones socket 149 Head restraint centre Seat Fear sise 78 EL o A A 78 79 Heated washer nozzles 93 PUSAN AP 141 rearview and door mirrors 98 o nn nes 98 Seals teu tapansedsinannan E ee deeaneans 140 Heat reflecting windscreen 95 High engine temperature 231 High pressure headlamp washing 93 Hill Descent Control 120 HomeLink an 125 Home safe lidhtinid 87 A mess ner 81 A ad 81 IAQS Interior Air Quality System 138 IC Inflatable Curtain 26 IDIS Int
223. n 03 Your driving environment CD Instruments and controls EA 03 gt gt 69 D 03 Your driving environment 03 Instruments and controls Meters o 4 t o Meters in the combined instrument panel Speedometer 2 Fuel gauge See also Trip computer page 166 and Refuelling page 219 Tachometer The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute rpm Indicator information and warning symbols A ONET y a RE Y 170 Z N ise fez Ed f gt 0 E MN Mom LED Indicator and warning symbols Main beam and direction indicator symbol 2 Indicator and information symbols Indicator and warning symbols Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in key position Il or when the engine is started When the engine has started all the symbols should go out except the parking brake sym bol which only goes out when the brake is dis engaged If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position Il then all symbols go out after 5 seconds except the symbol for faults in the car s emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure Indicator and information symbols Sym bol L T a Specification ABL fault Emissions system ABS fault Rear fog lamp on Stability system Engine preheater diesel Low level in fuel tank Information read
224. n a hill and 1st gear engaged manual gearbox or the gear selector must be in position P automatic gearbox Replacing the brake linings The rear brake linings must be replaced at a workshop due to the design of the electric parking brake an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended General HomeLink is a programmable remote control which can control up to three different devices e g garage door alarm system outdoor light ing and indoor lighting etc and in doing so replace their remote controls HomeLink is supplied built into the left hand sun visor The HomeLink panel consists of three pro grammable buttons and one indicator lamp HomeLink is designed not to work if the car is locked from the outside Save the original remote controls for future programming e g when switching to another car Delete the button programming when the car is to be sold Metallic sun visors should not be used in cars fitted with HomeLink This may have an adverse effect on its function Operation When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote controls Depress the programmed button to activate the garage door alarm system etc The indi cator lamp illuminates for the time that the but ton is kept depressed If the ignition is not activated HomeLink will work for 30 minutes after the driver s door has been opened The original remote controls ca
225. n combination with power driver s seat and power mirrors control key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked under Car settings gt Car Key memory Number of keys For a description of the menu system see page 130 Key memory door mirrors and driver s seat The settings are automatically connected to each respective remote control key see pages 77 and 97 The function can be activated deactivated under Car settings Car Key memory gt Seat 8 mirror positions For a description of the menu system see page 130 For cars with Keyless drive system see page 53 Indicator for locking unlocking When the car is locked or unlocked using the remote control key the direction indicators confirm that locking unlocking was correctly performed e Locking one flash e Unlocking two flashes After locking the indication is only given if all locks have been activated once the doors have been closed Selecting the function The function can be activated deactivated under Car settings Light settings Lock confirmation light and Car settings gt Light settings Unlock confirmation light For a description of the menu system see page 130 Immobiliser Each remote control key has a unique code The car can only be driven with the correct remote control key with the correct code The following error messages in the c
226. n of course be used in parallel with HomeLink WARNING If HomeLink is used to operate a garage door or gate ensure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is in motion Do not use the HomeLink remote control for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse The garage door must react immediately when it detects that something is preventing its movement and stop directly and reverse A garage door without these characteristics could cause personal injury For further information contact the supplier via the Internet www homelink com Programming for the first time The first step erases the memory in HomeLink and must not be carried out when only one individual button is being reprogram med 1 Depress the two outer buttons and do not release until the indicator lamp starts to flash after approx 20 seconds The flash ing indicates that HomeLink is set in learn mode and is ready to be pro grammed 2 Position the original remote control 5 30 cm from HomeLink Monitor the indi cator lamp Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment Q 03 gt gt 125 D 03 Your driving environment 03 126 The particular distance that is required between the original remote control and HomeLink depends on the programming of the device in question Perhaps several attempts will be required at different dis t
227. n s RDS network to break through The NEWS symbol indicates that the function is active Activate deactivate under FM settings News News from current all stations The radio can interrupt with news from only the set current station or from all stations Go to FM settings Advanced radio settings gt News station to change Programme types PTY The PTY function can be used to select differ ent programme types such as pop music and serious classic The PTY symbol indicates that the function is active This function allows pro gramme types broadcast within a set station s RDS network to break through 1 Activate in FM mode by selecting a pro gramme type under FM settings gt PTY gt Select PTY 2 Deactivate by clearing the PTY under FMI settings gt Clear all PTY PTY search This function searches the entire wavelength for the selected programme type 1 Select a PTY under FM settings PTY gt Select PTY 2 Goto FM settings gt PTY Program type Search PTY If the radio finds any of the selected pro gramme types gt To seek appears on the dis play To continue searching for another broad cast of the selected programme types press gt on the navigation button Display of programme type The programme type of the current station can be shown on the display Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM settings gt PTY gt Show PTY NOTE Not all radio
228. n that cruise control is set in standby mode The cruise control is then activated with or after which the current speed is stored in the memory the display text changes to show the selected speed e g 100 without brackets When the symbol changes ECS to icf the radar sensor has Ti FA detected a vehicle al JA Only when the symbol with car is illuminated is the distance to the vehicle in front regulated by the cruise control OL Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 30 km h Changing the speed In active mode the speed is adjusted with long or short presses on or D In active mode the button D has the same function as but results in a lower increase in speed The last press is stored in the memory If any cruise control button is held depressed for more than approx 1 minute then cruise control is disengaged The engine must be switched off in order to reset cruise control In certain situations cruise control cannot be activated Then the display shows Cruise control Unavailable see page 179 Set time interval Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the display as 1 5 horizontal lines the more lines the longer the time distance One line corre sponds to approximately 1 second 5 lines approximately 2 5 seconds The time interval is increased using t
229. n you can control the audio source using the car s audio controls Select the connection using the MODE button 1 If USB is selected then Connect device is shown in the display 2 Connect your iPod MP3 player or USB memory stick to the USB connection in the centre console s storage compartment see preceding illustration The text Loading is shown in the display when the system is loading the storage media s file structure This may take some time Once loading is complete track information is shown on the display and the desired track can be selected A track can be selected in three ways e With the TUNING control see page 148 e the navigation control s 4 right or left hand button or see page 148 e the steering wheel keypad see page 148 In USB or iPod mode the audio system oper ates in an equivalent way to the CD player for playing back music files For more information see page 153 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 191 D 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 152 Audio system The system supports the playback of music files in the MP3 WMA and WAV file formats However there are variants of these file for mats that are not supported by the system The system also supports most iPod mod els produced in 2005 or later iPod Shuffle is not supported USB connection and RSE D l F
230. nd the alarm is disarmed but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes then the alarm is automatically re armed The car is relocked at the same time Alarm signals When the alarm is triggered the following hap pens e A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the alarm is switched off The siren has its own 62 Option accessory for more information see Introduction battery which works independently of the car battery The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off Remote control key not working If the alarm cannot be switched off with the remote control key e g if the key s battery is discharged the car can be disarmed and the engine started as follows 1 Open the driver s door with the key blade gt The alarm is triggered the alarm indica tor flashes rapidly and the siren sounds Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch gt The alarm is deactivated and the alarm indicator goes out Start the engine Reduced alarm level To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm e g if a dog is left in the car or during transport on a car train or a car ferry the movement and tilt sensors can be temporarily deactivated The procedure is the same as with the tempo rary disengaging of deadlocks see page 59 Testing the alarm system Testing the movement detector in the passenger compartment 1 a a Close all windows Remain
231. ne brake circuit is damaged then this will mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to produce the normal braking effect The driver s brake pedal pressure is assisted by a brake servo WARNING The brake servo only works when the engine is running If the brake is used when the engine is switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force must be used to brake the car In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using engine braking Engine braking is most efficiently used if the same gear is used downhill as up For more general information on heavy loads on the car see page 300 Anti lock braking system The car is equipped with ABS Anti lock Braking System which prevents the wheels from locking during braking This means the ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a hazard for example Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal A short test of the ABS system is made auto matically after the engine has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal A further automatic test of the ABS system may be made when the car reaches 40 km h The test may be experienced as pulses in the brake pedal Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about sudden braking The function m
232. ng deactivated e Neutral position automatic lighting acti vated On left hand side depressed passenger compartment lighting on 03 Your driving environment CD Lighting Neutral position When the button is in neutral position the pas senger compartment lighting is switched on and off automatically in accordance with the following The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if e the caris unlocked with the remote control key or key blade see pages 45 or 48 e the engine is switched off and the remote control key is in position 0 Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when e the engine is started e the car is locked The passenger compartment lighting comes on and remains on for two minutes if one of the doors is open If any lighting is switched on manually and the car is locked then it will be switched off auto matically after two minutes Home safe light duration Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked 1 Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch 2 Move the left hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to the end position and release it The function can be activated in the same way as with main beam flash see page 82 3 Get out of the car and lock the door When the function is activated dipped beam parking lamps door mirror lamps numbe
233. ng illustration Press the seat cushion down to access the mounting points NOTE The ISOFIX fixture system is an accessory for the passenger seat Always follow the manufacturer s installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points Size classes Child seats are in different sizes cars are in different sizes This means that not all child seats are suitable for all seats in all car models Consequently there is a size classification for child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in order to assist users in choosing the correct child seat see the following table EA A Full size front facing child seat B Reduced size alt 1 front facing child seat B1 Reduced size alt 2 front facing child seat C Full size rear facing child seat D Reduced size rear facing child seat E Rear facing infant seat 01 Safety 9 Child safety 01 Description N V Never place a child in the passenger seat if Volvo recommends that you contact an the car is equipped with an activated airbag authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda a Transverseinfam soat lett tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo hand recommends G Transverse infant seat right hand If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi cation then the car model must be included on the child seat s vehicle list A O En Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats Infant se
234. nlocking A door can be unlocked from the inside in two different ways e Press the central locking button Al Press and hold at least 4 seconds to also open all the side windows simultaneously i Option accessory for more information see Introduction e Pull the door handle once and release the door is unlocked Pull the door handle again to open the door Locking e Press the central locking button after the front doors have been closed Press and hold at least 2 seconds to also close all the side windows and the sunroof simultaneously All doors can also be individually locked man ually with their lock buttons the door in ques tion must then be closed Global opening Press and hold the central locking button at least 4 seconds to also open all the win dows simultaneously for example to quickly ventilate the passenger compartment during hot weather Automatic locking The doors and tailgate are locked automati cally when the car starts to move The function can be activated deactivated under Car settings Lock settings gt Doors automatic lock For a description of the menu system see page 130 02 Locks and alarm Glovebox The glovebox can only be locked unlocked using the remote control key s detachable key blade For information on the key blade see page 47 Locking the glovebox E Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cylinder Turn the key blade 90 degrees
235. nserted 3 Check the lighting The headlamp must be mounted and the con nector correctly installed before the lighting is switched on or the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch Removing the cover 07 re N pe A o o Before starting to replace a bulb see page 263 1 Open the lock clamp by pressing up out 2 Press down the clips on the cover and Main beam Halogen remove it p Reinstall the cover in reverse order Dipped beam halogen y N E A o 0 1 Detach the headlamp Remove the cover o Y N a o OS Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise and then pulling straight out la PEE e Mendig py S69 page 203 Unplug the connector from the bulb Be REMOVE IE COVEN Replace the bulb and align it in the socket 3 Unplug the connector from the bulb and turn clockwise in order to secure it It 4 Detach the bulb by pressing the holder can be secured in one position downwards Reinstall the parts in reverse order 5 Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it in It can be secured in one position Reinstall the parts in reverse order 07 Maintenance and service Extra main beam Xenon Position parking lamps Direction indicators flashers 2 N N X N N e o o S 1 Detach the headlamp 1 Detach the headlamp 1 Detach the headlamp Remove the cover see page 264 2 Remove the cover se
236. nsmission is In certain countries not all approved dimen rims and tyres and the lowest permitted load needed to read the table For information with sions are indicated by the registration docu index LI and speed rating SS Information on respect to these details see page 290 ment or other documents The table below engine front wheel drive FWD or all wheel 205 60R16 225 55R16 225 50R17 245 45R17 245 40R18 7J3x16x50 73x16x50 7Jx17x50 8Jx17x55 8Jx18x55 7 54x17x55 T6 B6304T4 AWD aut 95 W Y Y Y J 32 B6324S5 FWD aut 94 V J Y Y Y 3 2 B6324S5 AWD aut 95 V J Y Y J D5 D5244T10 FWD man aut 94 V Y Y Y Y D5 D5244T10 AWD aut 95 V Y Y Y Y D3 D5204T2 FWD man 94 V Y J J Y J aut 94 H 2 51 B5254T10 FWD man aut 94 V Y J J J J 2 5T B5254T11 FWD man aut 94 V Y Y Y E 2 0T B4204T6 FWD man aut 92 V Y Y Y Y Y 08 2 0 B4204S3 FWD man aut 92 H Y Y Y Y Y 08 Specifications 01 10 OO 11 Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure 205 60R16 225 55R16 225 50R17 245 45R17 245 40R18 73x16x50 73x16x50 7Jx17x50 8Jx17x55 8Jx18x55 7 54x17x55 2206 B420454 FWD man aut 92 H Y Y Y Y Y D2 D4164T FWD man 92 H gt XC70 FWD man 215 65R16 235 55R17 235 50R18 235 45R19 RAEE FAA B6304T4 V 3 2 B6324S5 FWD aut 96 V Y Y Y 3 2 B6324S5 AWD aut 96 V Y Y Y D5 D5244T10 AWD man 96 V Y Y Y aut 96 H D3 D5204T2 AWD man aut 96 H Y Y 2 4D D5244T16 AWD aut 96 H Y Y Y 01 10 00 111 08 Specifications
237. nstruments and controls Clock also illuminate in conjunction with other sym bols Action 1 Stop in a safe place Do not drive the car further 2 Read the information on the information display Implement the action in accord ance with the message in the display Clear the message using the READ button Reminder doors not closed If one of the doors the bonnet or tailgate is not closed properly then the information or warn ing symbol illuminates together with an explan atory text message in the combined instrument panel Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door bonnet or boot lid whichever is open If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx 7 km h then the information symbol illuminates If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx 7 km h then the warning symbol illuminates 2 Only cars with alarm Trip meter G041939 Trip meter and controls Display for trip meter Controls for switching between trip meters T1 and T2 as well as resetting the trip meters The meters are used to measure short dis tances One short press on the control switches between the two trip meters T1 and T2 A long press more than 2 seconds resets an active trip meter to zero The distance is shown in the display 03 G041940 Clock and setting knob ay Controls for setting the clock 2 Information display for showing the time Turn the knob clockwi
238. nt is located under the floor in the cargo area If the car has been locked with privacy lock ing then the boot lid tailgate and floor hatch cannot be opened see page 49 G015352 06 Le re i 19 o Option accessory for more information see Introduction 249 06 250 Emergency puncture repair TMK General Emergency puncture repair TMK Temporary Mobility Kit is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust tyre pressure It consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid The kit works as a temporary repair The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced before its expira tion date and after use The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc tured in the tread The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the wall Do not seal tyres with the emergency puncture repair kit if they have larger slits cracks or similar damage 12 V sockets for connecting the compressor are located by the centre console in the front by the rear seat and in the cargo area Choose the electrical socket that is nearest the punc tured tyre Location of the emergency puncture repair kit Set up the warning triangle if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location The emergency puncture repair kit is located under the floor in the cargo area
239. nto position see arrow Press the strut in towards the grille and align the grille in the roof mounting Turn the handle 90 ER Press gently as in the illustration 1 if necessary Secure the grille by angling the handle 90 P e Removal of the grille takes place in reverse order Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it into the recesses atthe cargo area s rear posts IMPORTANT The safety grille cannot be folded up or down when the cargo cover is fitted Attaching the cargo cover Eb Move one end piece of the cover into the recess on the side panel E Move the other end piece into the corres ponding recess E Press both sides in A click should be audible and the red marking should disap pear gt Check that both end pieces are locked e Option accessory for more information see Introduction Removing the cargo cover 1 Press in one end piece button and lift it out 2 Carefully angle the cover up out and the other end piece loosens automatically Lowering the cargo cover s rear sealing disc In its rolled in position the cargo cover s rear sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the cargo area when it is fitted Pull the sealing disc back gently free from its support shelves and lower General Payload depends on the car s kerb weight The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories e g towbar reduces the car s payload by a corresponding weigh
240. o system is in AUX mode In which case avoid charging the player via the 12 V socket 1 Set the audio system in AUX mode using the MODE button press MENU and navi gate with 4 to AUX input volume see page 148 2 Turn the SOUND control or press P the navigation button see page 148 Audio controls Press the control SOUND repeatedly to browse among the following listed options Adjustment is made by turning the control 2 Only High Performance and Premium Sound Press MENU to access the audio settings For more information see page 130 e Bass Bass level e Treble Treble level e Fader Balance between the front and rear speakers e Balance Balance between the left and right hand speakers e Subwoofer Bass speaker level Turning the control anticlockwise to Min deac tivates the Subwoofer The Subwoofer is located as illustrated below G019419 Subwoofer location e Surround Surround settings Under Surround 3 channel stereo or Dolby Surround Pro Logic ll can be activated by selecting 3 ch or Dpl2 respectively This ena bles the following options e Centre level Level for centre speaker e Surround level Level for surround Equalizer The equalizer can be used to adjust different frequency bands separately 1 Goto Audio settings and select Equalizer front or Equalizer rear The sound level for the wavelength is adjusted with 4 W on the navigation but
241. od environmental care Reducing environmental impact You can easily help reduce environmental impact here are a few tips e Avoid letting the engine idle switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods Pay attention to local regulations e Drive economically think ahead e Perform service and maintenance in accordance with the owner s manual s instructions follow the Service and War ranty Booklet s recommended intervals e fthe car is equipped with an engine block heater use it before starting from cold it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather and the engine rea ches normal operating temperature more quickly which lowers consumption and reduces emissions e High speed increases consumption con siderably due to increased wind resistance a doubling of speed increases wind resis tance 4 times Option accessory for more information see Introduction e Always dispose of environmentally hazar dous waste such as batteries and oils in an environmentally safe manner Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended Following this advice can save money the planet s resources are saved and the car s durability is extended For more information and further advice see the pages 216 and 306 Recycling As a part of Volvo s environmental work it is important that the car is r
242. oguard Blow longer Blowing too hard blow more gently Alcoguard Blow softer i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 105 D 03 Your driving environment 03 106 Alcoguard Display text Meaning Action Alcoguard Blow Blowing too weak harder blow harder Alcoguard wait Heating not finished Preheating wait for text Alco guard Blow 5 sec onds P Option accessory for more information see Introduction Starting the engine Petrol and diesel engines Ignition switch with inserted remote control key and START STOP ENGINE button IMPORTANT Do not press in the remote control key incor rectly turned Hold the end with the detach able key blade see page 47 1 Fit the remote control key in the ignition switch Gently press the key until it is drawn into the lock Note that if the car is equipped with an alcolock then a breath test must first be approved before the engine can be started see page 103 2 Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed For cars with automatic gearbox Depress the brake pedal 3 Press the START STOP ENGINE button and then release it For diesel engined cars there may be a slight delay before the engine can be started Engine Preheating is displayed in the meantime The starter motor works until the engine has started but for no longer than 10 seconds die sel up to 60 seconds If the
243. omatic tailgate 30 opening Option accessory for more information see Introduction 281 07 Maintenance and service 07 Car care Washing the car Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator Use car shampoo e Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible Bird droppings con tain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discoloration e Hose down the underbody e Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt Do not spray directly onto the locks e Wash using a sponge car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water e Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo e Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces e Dry the car using a clean soft chamois or a water scraper WARNING Always have the engine cleaned by a work shop There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot IMPORTANT Dirty headlamps have impaired functional ity Clean them regularly when refuelling for example Outside lighting such as headlamps fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens This is anatural phenomenon all outside lighting is designed to withstand this Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when it has been switched on for a time Cleaning the wiper blades Asphalt dust and
244. ombined instrument panel s information display are rela ted to the electronic immobiliser 02 Locks and alarm Remote control key key blade Key error Try again Car key not found Only applies to Key less drive with PCC Immobiliser Try start again Error reading the remote control key during starting Remove the key re insert it and try to start again Error reading the PCC during starting Try to start again If the error persists Press the remote control key into the ignition switch and try to start again Error in immobiliser system during star ting If the fault per sists the recommen dation is to contact an authorised Volvo workshop For starting the car see page 107 Functions Remote control key Locking Unlocking Approach light duration Tailgate Panic function 02 PCC Personal Car Communicator 3 Information Function buttons Locking Locks the doors and tailgate while the alarm is activated Press and hold at least 2 seconds to close all the windows and sunroof simultaneously WARNING If the sunroof and windows are closed using the remote control key check that no one is in danger of getting hands caught Unlocking Unlocks the doors and tail gate while the alarm is deactivated gt gt 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 45 02 Locks and alarm 02 46 Remote control key key blade
245. on sumption 05 e Use engine braking to slow down when it can take place without risk to other road users e Drive in the highest gear possible adapted to the current traffic situation and road lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption e A roof load and ski box increase air resis tance leading to higher fuel consumption remove the load carriers when not in use e Do not run the engine to operating tem perature at idling speed but rather drive with a light load as soon as possible a cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one e The V70 with the D5 engine and 6 speed manual transmission is started in 2nd gear under normal conditions For more information and further advice see the pages 11 and 306 Never switch off the engine while moving such as downhill this deactivates important systems such as the power steering and brake servo Driving in water The car can be driven through water at a maxi mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of 10 km h Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water During driving in water maintain a low speed and do not stop the car When the water has been passed depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function Clean the electric contacts of the electric engine block heater and trailer coupling after driving in
246. on of rotation co N N pe A 0 The arrow shows the tyre s direction of rotation Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions never between left and right hand sides or vice versa If the tyres are fitted incorrectly the car s braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car to decrease the risk of skidding Ensure that tyres of the same type and dimensions and also the same make are fitted to all four wheels Follow the recommended tyre pressures specified in the tyre pressure table see page 310 Tyre care Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged Tyres age and decompose even if they are hardly ever or never used The func tion can therefore be affected This applies to all tyres that are stored for future use Exam ples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discol oration New tyres D A o 5 t o Tyres are perishable After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity characteristics gradu
247. one built in overview 210 CONS uno 208 Hands tee 205 incoming CAS 206 MARIA CARS asiedel 206 MESSAgES rss esressrnnne 212 OO ee en 210 phone DOC 208 phone book shortcut 208 receiving a Gall 207 register phone 205 FING Signal 211 lt A 213 Phone OOK cia tees ano 212 Pinch protection sunroof 102 PONS TANNG A A AA 283 Position parking lamps 84 POW Gi SOS na 77 Powershift gearbox 115 297 Power SUNrOO en 101 Power windows 95 PRIVACY IOCKING sun 49 Puncture see Tyres 247 Putting calls ON hold 211 Radar SCNSOLM 0cecececececececeececececeaeaeacs 173 o de nsc 177 Rain SCNSOM c ccecececeeceeeceeeaeaeeeaeaeaeaeaeaeas 92 Rear bulbs e ncwsdvsevactacvsiesdievansacesawavestecsecesaeans 267 Rear control panel AUGIO SVS EMI erreren 149 Rearview and door mirrors electrically retractable 97 ic AP e 98 OS 98 Rear window defrosting 98 RecircUi OP ascii diia 142 Recommendations during driving 216 Recommended child seats table 33 PRO COW a PAPA PRE oo 238 Remato aeaie 137 RellielliNnG s nisartaicants 219 WE Eee o ras 219 fuel filler flap electrical opening 219 fuel filler flap manual opening 219 POTUG NMG is 219 Relay fuse box see
248. ons for using rear fog lamps vary between different countries Hazard warning flashers Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers Both direction indicator symbols in the combined instrument panel flash when the hazard warning flashers are in use The hazard warning flashers are activated automatically when the car brakes so suddenly that the emergency brake lights are activated and speed is below 30 km h They remain on when the car has stopped and are deactivated automatically when the car is driven off again or the button is depressed For more informa tion on Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers see page 118 Direction indicators flashers G021148 1 Direction indicators flashers Short flash sequence ED Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release The direction indicators flash three times The function can be activated deactivated under Car settings Light settings gt Turn indicators 3 flash For a description of the menu sys tem see page 131 03 Your driving environment O Lighting 03 ad AS D 03 Your driving environment 03 Lighting Continuous flash sequence 23 Move the stalk switch up or down to the outer position The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually or automatically by the steering wheel movement Direction indicator symbols For direction indicator symbols see page
249. ontents A O A O 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls 66 REPOSO sia 74 A a cee aenerdne E E 76 Steering WCE ER 81 Lo AA AA 82 wipes and washino Se ae 92 Windows rearview and door mirrors 95 Compass Sa 100 One sunro s 0 101 occ A 108 sating the tie 107 Starting the engine Flexifuel 109 Starting the engine external battery 111 COCO A A 112 All wheel drive AWD 117 FOOD to eee eee renee 118 Hill Descent Control HDO 120 Parkmg Drake ER en 122 Home a a a st 125 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Menus and messages 130 Climate control aea an seer meet eee 187 Fuel driven engine block heater and pas senger compartment heater 144 Peaimonal heater RA occ 147 ANAD system 7 148 RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system Bu Scree ene 161 lo compile 7 0 166 DSTC Stability and traction control sys A A 0 168 Adapting driving characteristics 170 liso conte 171 Adaptive cruise control 173 Biseance Alert 181 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 184 Driver Alert System DAC 190 Driver Alert System LDW 193 Palk assist SYST camer uence sate race 196 BLIS Blind Spot Information System 199 Comfort inside the passenger compart MENE EA
250. oo low the parking heater is switched off automatically and a message appears on the information display Acknowledge the mes sage by pressing once on the indicator stalk READ button see page 145 IMPORTANT Repeated use of the parking heater com bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the car s battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Fuel driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater Operation Sym Display Specification Sym Display Specification bol jefe 7 lt Fuel The heater is Heater Setting the heater Vd MN ito heater switched on and to unavail is not possible due ON running Low fuel to fuel level being gt P 934 Y level too low Timer is The heater s timer MM approx 7 litres 2 set for is activated after this is in order to JOOOkm to empty tank mt Fuel the remote control facilitate starting heater key has been the engine as well m removed from the as approx 50 km i ignition switch and driving i leaving the car READ button the engine and Park Heater not work Thumbwheel passenger com ito heater ing Contact a partment are ms Service workshop for RESET button heated at the set required repair Volvo rec
251. or and information symbols Shown below are the most common symbols with their meanings and a reference to where in the manual further information can be found For more information on symbols and text messages see pages 70 71 and 134 The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and or driveability of the car At the same time an explanatory text is dis played in the information display The yellow information symbol D illumi nates in combination with text in the informa tion display when a deviation in any of the car s systems has occurred The yellow symbol information can also illuminate in combination with other symbols Symbols in the display Indicator and warning symbols in the combined instrument panel Sym Page bol ES Low oil pressure Parking brake TOG 122 123 Airbags SRS 19 71 Seatbelt reminder 16 71 Alternator not charg 71 ing Fault in the brake 71 119 system Warning safety 19 30 mode ES 08 Specifications Indicator and information symbols in the combined instrument panel Sym Page bol Fault in the ABL sys 70 83 tem Emissions system 70 Fault in the ABS sys 70 119 tem Rear fog lamp on 70 85 Stability system 70 120 DSTC Hill descent 168 control Engine preheater 70 diesel Low level in fuel tank 70 145 Information read dis 70 play text Main beam on 70 83 SERE 2E 7 Opt
252. or and then causing damage e General interior lighting in the roof reading Removing the headlamp lamps p Headlamps front 1 Press the START STOP ENGINE button Glovebox lighting quickly y m Courtesy lighting MS A 2 Upper illustration Direction indicators door mirror ER Pull out the headlamp s locking pins Approach lighting Brake light fog lamp reversing lamp F2 Pull the headlamp straight forward Rear side position lamps position lamps IMPORTANT Do not pull the electrical cable only the con nector Xenon Active Xenon lamps LED lamps general On cars equipped with Xenon lamps head lamp replacement must be performed at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended The lamp must be han dled with extreme caution because it is equipped with a high voltage unit 3 Lowerillustration E Detach the headlamp connector by pressing down the clip with your thumb E gt At the same time guide out the con 07 nector with your other hand 4 Lift out the headlamp and place it on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the engine compartment Loosen and remove the 5 Replace the bulb in question whole headlamp gt gt 07 Maintenance and service Installing the headlamp 1 Plug in the connector A clicking sound should be heard 2 Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins Check that they are correctly i
253. orce is required to disengage the hatch lock Opening closing the fuel cap AP tt PD VOLVO 31301658 A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in the event of high outside temperatures Open 05 the cap slowly After refuelling refit the cap and turn it until one or more clicking sounds are heard Filling up with fuel Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out NOTE Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather 05 During your journey 05 General information on fuel Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo must not be used as engine power and fuel consumption is negatively affected Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get ting fuel splashes in the eyes In the event of fuel in the eyes remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention Never swallow fuel Fuels such as petrol bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swal lowed Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited Switch off the fuel driven heater before star ting to refuel Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling The ring signal could cause spark build up and ignite petrol fumes leading to fire and injury IMPORTANT Mixing different types of fuel or the
254. over the cold section in the engine compart ment The round cover must be removed first before the reservoir cap can be reached 1 Turn and open the cover located on the covering 2 Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks which are located on the inside of the reservoir IMPORTANT Do not forget to refit the cap Power steering fluid IMPORTANT Keep the area around the power steering fluid reservoir clean when checking The cover must not be opened Check the level frequently The fluid does not require changing The fluid level must be 07 Maintenance and service Engine compartment 07 gt gt 07 Maintenance and service Engine compartment between the MIN and MAX marks For capaci ties and recommended fluid grade see page 302 If a fault should arise in the power steering system or if the engine is switched off and the car must be towed it can still be steered 07 07 Maintenance and service General IMPORTANT WARNING For bulb specification see page 268 Bulbs f ial h Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with Always switch off the ignition and remove and spotlights that are of a special type or that your fingers Grease and oils from your fin the remote control key before starting to are only suitable for replacement by a work gers are vaporised by the heat coating the replace a bulb shop are reflect
255. ower stage Press the but cushion ton It is not possible to adjust the booster cush ion from stage 2 to stage 1 It must first be reset by being fully folded into the seat cushion Refer to the heading below Low ering the two stage booster cushion Lowering the two stage booster cushion Lowering can take place from both the upper and lower stage to fully lowered position in the cushion However it is not possible to adjust G017694 G017784 S 01 Safety Child safety Press down with your hand in the centre of the cushion in order to lock it WARNING If the instructions regarding the two stage booster cushion are not followed then this could cause serious injury to a child in the event of an accident IMPORTANT Check that there are no loose objects e g toys left behind in the space under the cushion before lowering The booster cushion must be lowered first when lowering the backrest Child safety locks rear doors The controls for operating the rear door power windows and the rear door opening handles can be blocked from opening from the inside For more information see page 61 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats xl 3 S oO Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are concealed behind the lower section of the rear seat backrest in the outer seats The location of the mounting points is indicated by symbols in the backrest upholstery See pre cedi
256. ows d j m y re m g a y F Le A Biol i Fii P j E 0 y r i LE B b L d b l H Y Le i i i 7 ais K j A safety grille prevents loads or pets from being thrown forward in the passenger com partment in the event of sudden braking Folding up Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and pull back up The safety grille cannot be folded up or down when a cargo cover is fitted Fitting removal The safety grille is normally permanently instal led in the car because it can easily be folded up in the roof and so be out of the way if a longer cargo area is required However if desired the safety grille can be dismantled and removed from the car For safety reasons the safety grille must always be correctly fastened and secured when being refitted Fitting The backrests must first be lowered to allow the safety grille to be fitted see page 79 The safety grille is most easily fitted removed by two people via the rear doors During fitting the handle should be on the front of the T see the illustrations a G018367 i A i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 During your journey Cargo area 05 gt gt 229 05 During your journey 05 230 Cargo area G018368 QD oO oO o GS Position the handle in fitting position see illustration Press gently on the handle to enable it to be turned i
257. p slides off Bag holder Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place and prevents them from overturning and spreading their contents across the cargo area 1 Fold up the holder which is part of the floor hatch 2 Fasten the bags with strap and secure the carrying handle in the hooks Loading 12 V electrical socket Lower the cover to access the electrical socket The socket also provides voltage when the remote control key is not in the ignition switch Remember not to use the electrical socket with the engine switched off because of the risk of discharging the car s battery i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 During your journey 05 227 05 228 05 During your journey Cargo area Safety net G024628 Storage space safety net cassettes A rollable safety net comprising two cassettes has a storage space under the cargo area floor hatch Securing the net cassettes G024629 The two part safety net cassette is secured on the rear of the backrest The narrowest cas sette is secured on the left hand side seen from the tailgate 1 Fold the rear seat s backrest forward see page 79 2 Align the cassette s anchor rails in front of the backrest attachment lugs ED 3 Slide the cassette into the attachment lugs 4 Fold back and lock the backrests e Removing the cassette
258. pa AE Li L D N y 2 o If the car is equipped with RSE then the USB connection is located in accordance with the above illustration Audio sources USB memory To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick only store music files on it It takes a lot longer for the system to load storage media that con tains anything other than compatible music files The system supports removable media which is compatible with USB 2 0 and the FAT32 file system and can handle a maxi mum of 500 folders and 64 000 files The memory must have a capacity of at least 256 Mb When using a longer model USB memory stick the use of the enclosed USB adapter cable is recommended This is to avoid mechanical wear to the USB input and the connected USB memory stick MP3 player Many MP3 players have their own file systems that are not supported by the audio system For use in the system an MP3 player must be set in USB Removable device Mass Storage Device mode iPod An iPod is charged and supplied with power by the USB connection via the player s con nection cable However if the player s battery 3 Option accessory for more information see Introduction is fully discharged then it must be charged before being connected When an iPod is used as audio source the car s infotainment system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player s own menu structure For information on US
259. peeds in temperatures colder than 30 C or hot ter than 40 C The above also apply to shorter driving dis tances at low temperatures Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions It provides extra protection for the engine Volvo recommends Castrol oil products IMPORTANT In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine s service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life starting characteristics fuel consumption and environmental impact An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter vals can be applied Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change otherwise you will risk affecting service life starting characteristics fuel consumption and environmental impact Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used Viscosity chart a qa 7 22 SAE 0W 40 4 14 32 50 68 Engine oil grade Engine variant 2 5P 25 3 2 T6 D3 D5 2 0 2 0F Zell 1 6D Engine code B5254T11 B5254T10 B6324S5 B6304T4 D5204T2 D5244T10 B420483 B420484 B4204T6 D4164T Recommended oil grade Oil grade ACEA A5 B5 Viscosity SAE OW 30 Oil grade ACEA A5 B5 Viscosity SAE 5W 30 In the event o
260. performed by a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended BLIS Blind Spot Information System In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso lated occasions despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot then this does not mean that a fault has arisen in the system Own shadow on large light smooth surface e g noise barrier or concrete road surface In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the display shows the text Blind spot syst Service required Here are several examples of situations where the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera Reflection from shiny wet road surface ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction G021432 04 Comfort and driving pleasure an 04 201 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Comfort inside the passenger compartment Storage spaces 1 Storage compartment in door panel Storage pocket on front edge of front seat cushions Ticket clip O Glovebox E Storage compartment cup holder Jacket holder Q Cup holder in armrest rear seat Storage pocket Jacket holder The jacket holder is only designed for light clothing WARNING 4 Keep loose objects such as mobile phones cameras remote controls for accessories
261. pressure is recommended applies for both full load and light load in order to obtain optimum fuel economy Checking the tyre pressure The tyre pressures must be checked every month This also applies to the car s spare wheel Check tyre pressures on cold tyres Cold tyres means the tyres are the same tempera ture as the ambient temperature After several kilometres of driving the tyres warm up and the pressure increases Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con sumption shortens tyre lifespan and impairs the car s roadholding Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheating and being damaged Tyre pres sure affects travelling comfort road noise and steering characteristics Tyre pressure decreases over time this is a natural phenomenon Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature 06 Wheels and tyres Warning triangle and first aid kit E Lift the floor hatch and take out the warning First aid kit triangle Take the warning triangle from the case fold out and assemble the two loose sides Fold out the warning triangle s support legs Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle Position the warning triangle in a suit able place with regard to traffic G017956 Ensure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the cargo area after use Ce 1 A co E o 0 A case with first aid equipme
262. proceed as above but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork 07 Maintenance and service VDC designations a EEA 290 y A 292 Engine SpeCificationS ccccccccccscssccssscsesssssssssessessssssessesssessensessensess 298 A Nu E 300 0 il 2 0 E aim A en en 302 AA RON A 304 Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure oocccoccnccncnccnoncncnncnnnaninnos 308 00 2 il EleciAcal SM ee 0 A 3410 TYPOS VAD prov en a A 314 Symbols in the slam tras Pr aaa 315 288 01 10 SPECIFICATIONS ol 0110 OO 17 08 Specifications Type designations Label location VOLVO CAR CORPORATION A A G043480 Type designations Knowing the car s type designation vehicle identification and engine numbers can facili tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories 1 Type designation vehicle identification number maximum permissible weights codes for colour and upholstery and type approval number The label is visible when the right rear door is opened Label for parking heater Engine code component and serial num bers O The engine oil label specifies oil grade and viscosity O Gearbox type designation and serial num ber Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox Car s identification number VIN Vehicle Identification Number Further information on the car is presen
263. ptable level For more possible display messages with their respective proposals for solutions concerning automatic transmission see page 134 A display text clears automatically after the action has been carried out or after one press on the indicator stalk READ button Symbol Display AA ET Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con Transmission overheated Keep the car stationary using the foot brake Transmission overheated Park the car immediately in a safe manner Transmission overheated For fastest cool ing Run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the message clears All wheel drive AWD All Wheel Drive is always available G039678 All Wheel Drive means that the car is driving all four wheels at the same time The power is automatically distributed between the front and rear wheels An elec tronically controlled clutch system distributes the power to the wheels that have the best grip on the current road surface This provides the best traction and prevents wheel spin Under normal driving conditions the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain snow and icy conditions 03 Your driving environment D Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 D 03 Your driving environment 03 Foot brake General The car is equipped with two brake circuits If o
264. r first journey This will give you the opportunity to familiarise yourself with new functions to see how best to handle the car in different sit uations and to make the best use of all the car s features Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the manual The specifications design features and illus trations in this owner s manual are not binding We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice Volvo Car Corporation Option All types of option accessory are marked with an asterisk In addition to standard equipment this manual also describes options factory fitted equip ment and certain accessories retrofitted extra equipment The equipment described in the owner s man ual is not available in all cars they have dif ferent equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations In the event of uncertainty over what is stand ard or an option accessory contact a Volvo dealer Special texts Warning texts advise of a risk of personal injury Important texts advise of a risk of material damage NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam ple Footnote There is footnote information in the owner s manual that is located at the bottom of the page This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number If the footnote refers to text
265. r plate lighting interior roof lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on The length of time for which the home safe lighting should be kept on can be set under Car settings Light settings gt Home safe light duration For a description of the menu sys tem see page 130 Approach light duration Approach lighting is switched on with the remote control key see page 45 and is used to switch on the car s lighting at a distance When the function is activated with the remote control parking lamps door mirror lamps number plate lighting interior roof lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on The length of time for which the approach light ing should be kept on can be set under Car settings gt Light settings gt Approach light duration For a description of the menu sys tem see page 130 Adjusting headlamp pattern G021151 Headlamp pattern left hand traffic D 03 Your driving environment 03 88 Lighting A 10 E A o o Headlamp pattern right hand traffic The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be set for right or left hand traffic The correct pat tern will also better illuminate the verge Xenon headlamps Headlamp control for adjusting headlamp pattern Normal position the headlamp pattern is correct for the country in which the car was delivered Ej Adapted position designed for opposite headlamp pattern
266. rake effectively in a critical situation e Auto Brake Brakes the car automatically when a collision is unavoidable The Auto Brake function cannot prevent a collision but instead aims to reduce collision speed The collision warning system is activated in sit uations where the driver should have started braking a lot earlier which is why the function cannot help the driver in every situation Collision Warning with Auto Brake is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention The collision warning system must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his her driving style If the driver solely relies on Colli sion Warning with Auto Brake to do the brak ing there will be a collision sooner or later IMPORTANT Maintenance of collision warning system components must only be performed at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended The collision warning system does not work in all driving situations and traffic weather and road conditions The collision warning system does not react to vehicles driving in another direction to the car orto people and animals Warning only activated in the event of a high risk for collision The Function section and the section after advise about limitations of which the driver should be aware before using Collision Warning with Auto Brake The Auto Brake function can only reduce the collision speed The driver must depress
267. re stored in Call register Dialled calls are also shown by pressing ENTER The phone num bers in the lists can be saved in the phone book Call duration Call duration is stored under Call register Call duration Reset the values under Call register gt Call duration gt Reset timers Show hide number for third party The phone number can be temporarily hidden under Call options gt Send my number 212 Option accessory for more information see Introduction IMEI number In order to block a phone the network provider must be advised of the phone s IMEl number Dial 06 to show the number in the dis play Write it down and keep it in a safe place Network selection The network can be selected either automati cally or manually under Phone settings gt Network selection SIM code and security The PIN code can protect the SIM card from unauthorised use The code can be changed under Phone settings Edit PIN code Change the security level under Phone settings SIM security Select maximum security with the On option The code will then need to be entered each time the phone is switched on Select the next highest security level with the Automatic option The phone then stores the code and automatically specifies it when the phone is switched on When the SIM card is used with another phone the code must be entered manually Select minimum security with the Off option The SIM card
268. re indicated with a cross beneath the outside handle Navigation Tailgate movement is stopped following the ENTER same pattern as when pinch protection is trig gered Refer to this chapter s section with the MENU heading Pinch protection O EXIT Deadlocks 1 If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside then Deadlocks means that all IOK buttons and the deadlocks function can be temporarily door handles are mechanically disengaged switched off This is carried out as follows which prevents doors being opened from the inside 1 Access the menu system under Car The deadlocks are activated with the remote neo pa bl ne pd i control key and are set after an approximately y FE 2 Select Reduced guard 1 Only in combination with alarm gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 59 02 Locks and alarm Locking unlocking 3 Select Activate once Press EXIT and lock the car gt The instrument panel display shows the message Reduced guard See manual and the deadlocks function is switched off when the car is locked Remember that the car s alarm is armed 02 when the car is locked a If any of the doors are opened from the Select Ask on exit inside then the alarm will be triggered gt Each time the engine is switched off the audio system s display shows the mes sage Press ENTER to reduce guard BULLEN until engine is started Press
269. rection indicators 3 Replace the bulb 3 Check that the bulb illuminates and press O Reflector rear 4 Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it PAC Ula ap MOUS into place Rear fog lamp one side SH Reversing lamp Brake light LED Brake light LED 07 gt gt 07 Maintenance and service Vanity mirror lighting Removing the mirror glass o rte N e A o o 1 Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower edge in the centre Carefully prize up the lug on the edge 2 Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge on the left and right hand sides by the black rubber sections and prize carefully so that the glass comes loose in the lower edge of 3 Carefully detach and lift aside the entire mirror glass and cover 4 Replace the bulb Fitting the mirror glass 1 Press the three lugs at top edge of the mir ror glass back into position position mesa dd bulbs See Extra main beam Xenon ABL Dipped beam hal ogen Main beam Halo gen Front direction indicators Direction indica tors rear Front fog lamps Cargo area light ing number plate lighting Vanity mirror 99 65 21 21 39 1 2 2 Then press the three lower lugs back into H7 H9 H21W PY21W H8 Tubular lamp SV8 5 Tubular lamp SV5 5 Lighting wo Type Front position and 5 W5W parking lamps Front side marker 5 W5W lamps Glovebox lighting 5 Tubular lamp SV8
270. ree times when BLIS is activated The system can be deactivated activated after starting the engine with one press on the BLIS button When BLIS is deactivated the lamp in the but ton goes out and a message is shown in the instrument panel display 04 When BLIS is activated the light in the button illuminates a new text message is shown on the display and the indicator lamps in the door panels flash three times Press the READ but ton to delete the text message For a descrip tion of messages see page 134 When BLIS operates The system operates when the car is driven at a speed above 10 km h Overtaking The system is designed to react if e you overtake another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km h faster than the other vehicle e you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km h faster than you are travelling WARNING BLIS does not work in sharp bends BLIS does not work when the car is revers ing A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes It can pre vent the vehicle in the screened area from being detected by BLIS Daylight and darkness In daylight the system reacts to the shape of the surrounding vehicles The system is designed to detect motor vehicles such as cars trucks buses and motorcycles In darkness the system reacts to the head lamps of surrounding vehicles If the head lamps of surrounding vehicles are not switched on then the system does not
271. ring overtaking does not affect the cruise control setting the car returns to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released If any cruise control button is held depressed for more than approx 1 minute then cruise control is disengaged The engine must be switched off in orderto reset cruise control Temporary deactivation standby mode Press o to temporarily disengage the cruise control and set it in standby mode set speed is shown in brackets in the display 5 e g 100 km h Automatic standby mode Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if e wheels lose traction the foot brake is used speed falls below approx 30 km h the clutch pedal is depressed the gear selector is moved to neutral posi tion automatic gearbox e the driver maintains a speed higher than the set speed for longer than 1 minute The driver must then regulate the speed Resume set speed Cruise control in standby mode is re activated with one press on the steering wheel button O the speed is then set to the last stored speed A significant increase in speed may arise after the speed has been resumed with D ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 17 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Cruise control Deactivate The cruise control is switched off with the steering wheel button CRUI
272. riveable hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once moving Moving the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode See manual has been reset the car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous position Do not move the car further than necessary Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See manual has been displayed Never under any circumstances attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode message is displayed Leave the car at once If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed It must be transported from its loca tion Volvo recommends that it is transpor ted to an authorised Volvo workshop 01 Safety 9 Child safety 01 Children should sit comfortably and safely Volvo recommends that children travel in rear facing child seats until as late an age as pos sible at least until 3 4 years of age and then front facing booster cushions child seats until up to 10 years of age The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child s weight and size for more information see page 33 Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun try Check
273. rked sensors bar is fully filled in see figure 2 If the detected obstacle is within the distance for the constant tone both behind and in front of the car then the tone sounds alternately from the loudspeakers Rear parking assistance E REREN G017833 The distance covered to the rear of the car is about 1 5 metres The acoustic signal for obstacles behind comes from one of the rear loudspeakers Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged The system must be deactivated when revers ing with a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar or similar otherwise they would trigger the sensors Rear parking assistance is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used Front parking assistance ED ET F G021424 The distance covered in front of the car is about 0 8 metres The acoustic signal for obstacles in front comes from one of the front loudspeak ers Front parking assistance is active up to 15 km h The lamp in the button is illuminated in order to indicate that the system is activated When the speed is below 10 km h the system is reactivated Front parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied or P mode is selected in a car with an automatic gear box IMPORTANT When fitting auxiliary lamps Remember that they must not obscure the sensors the auxiliary lamps could then be detected as obstacles
274. roduction Volvo and the environment the level of certain unhealthy gases such as carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic queues and tunnels for example The entry of nitrous oxides ground level ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon filter Textile standard The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea sant and comfortable even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers Extreme attention has been given to choosing environmentally compatible materials This means that they also fulfil the requirements in the Oeko Tex 100 standard a major advance towards a healthier passenger compartment environment Oeko Tex certification covers seatbelts car pets and fabrics for example The leather in the upholstery undergoes chromium free tanning and fulfils the certification requirements Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car In this way you contribute to a cleaner environment When Volvo s workshops are entrusted with the service and mainte nance of your car it becomes part of our sys 1 More information on www oekotex com tem Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which our workshops are designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment Our workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee go
275. rs the possibil ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel e Start from neutral position N and only engage reverse gear R when the car is sta tionary Automatic gearbox Geartronic E di N D Automatic gear positions M Manual gear positions The information display shows the position of the gear selector using the following indica tions P R N D S 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 see page 69 112 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Gear positions Parking position P Select P when starting the engine or when the car is parked The brake pedal must be depressed to disengage the gear selector from the P position The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged Activate the electric parking brake by pressing the button see page 122 IMPORTANT The car must be stationary when position P is selected Reverse R The car must be stationary when position R is selected Neutral position N No gear is engaged and the engine can be started Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in position N Drive D D is the normal driving position Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed The car must be stationary when the gear selector is moved to position D from position R Gearboxes Geartronic Manual gear positions The driv
276. ry for more information see Introduction If the fan is fully disengaged the air condi tioning is not engaged which may result in a risk of misting windows Heated seats Front seats Press the button once for the highest heat level three lamps illuminate Press the button twice for a lower heat level two lamps illuminate Press the button three times for the lowest heat level one lamp illuminates Press the button four times to switch off the heat no lamps illuminate The heating is normally switched off at start up If the heating has been switched on then it is switched off automatically when the engine is switched off Automatic start of heating can be activated deactivated in the menu under Climate settings gt Seat heating off during starting Climate control Seat heating is switched off automatically after a while The function can be deactivated acti vated in the menu under Climate settings gt Seat heating time limit For a description of the menu system see page 130 WARNING The heated seat should not be used by peo ple who find it difficult to perceive tempera ture increase because of sensory loss or for any reason have difficulty in managing to use the control of the heated seat Other wise burn injuries may arise Air distribution The figure consists of three buttons When the buttons are pressed a lamp in front of the respective part of
277. s not possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC is on the opposite side of the car The red rings in the preceding illustration indi cate the range covered by the system s anten nas If all PCCs are removed from the car when the engine is running or key position Il is active see page 74 and if all doors are closed then a warning message is shown in the information display and an audio reminder signal sounds at the same time The warning message clears and the audio reminder signal stops when the PCC is brought back to the car after e a door has been opened and closed e the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch e the READ button has been pressed Handling the PCC safely If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in the car it is deactivated temporarily when the car is locked This prevents unauthorised entry However if someone breaks into the car opens the door and finds the PCC it can be reactivated It is therefore important to handle all PCCs with great care IMPORTANT Never leave a PCC behind in the car Interference to PCC function Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter fere with the keyless drive system For this rea son do not place the PCC near mobile phones or metallic objects If interference is experienced nonetheless use the PCC and the key blade as a remote control key see page 45 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm
278. s or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and or audio system In which case charge the battery by star ting the engine and then running it for at least 15 minutes battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary Before a long journey e Check that the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption is normal e Make sure that there are no leaks fuel oil or other fluid e Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths e Carrying a warning triangle is a legal requirement in certain countries Winter driving Check the following in particular before the cold season e The engine coolant must contain at least 50 glycol This mixture protects the engine against frost erosion down to approximately 35 C To achieve optimum antifreeze protection different types of gly col must not be mixed e The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation e Engine oil viscosity is important Oils with lower viscosity thinner oils facilitate star ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold For more information on suitable oils see page 301 05 During your journey Recommendations during driving 05 gt gt 05 During your journey Recommendations during driving IMPORTANT Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather e The condition of the battery and charge
279. s takes place in reverse order Using the safety net ELLIE T AT Da M y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Pull the net up from the cassettes The net is self locking after about 1 minute if the rear seat s backrests are raised ED Pull up the right hand section of the net using its strap ED Insert the rod in the mounting on the right hand side and then press it forward the rod locks in with a click Eh Pull out the rod s telescope section and click it in on the other side E Pull up the left hand safety net and hook it into the rod e Folding up takes place in reverse order The net can also be used when the rear seat s backrests are folded forward Removing the net cassettes 1 Roll the safety nets into the cassettes in accordance with the procedure in the sec tion entitled Using the safety net but in reverse 2 Fold the whole backrest forward Slide the cassettes out until they loosen from the anchor rails Store the cassettes in their compartment under the cargo area floor hatch Loads in the cargo area must be firmly secured even if the safety net is correctly fitted Safety net combined with cargo cover G018247 Puller straps for raising the net The safety net can also be raised from the rear seat when the cargo cover is extended Follow the procedure in the section entitled Using the safety net The straps for raising are located by the arr
280. s the remote control key together buttons facing up this is to avoid the bat teries falling out when it is opened 2 Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot IMPORTANT 3 Lightly press the key blade You should Avoid touching the battery and its terminals hear a click when the key blade is locked with your fingers as this could damage their in functionality gt gt 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 51 02 Locks and alarm Battery replacement remote control key PCC IMPORTANT 02 Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way 52 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Keyless lock and ignition system only PCC General G017871 The keyless drive function in the PCC allows the car to be unlocked driven and locked with out the need for a key You simply have to have the PCC with you The system makes it easier and more convenient to open the car e g when your hands are full Both of the car s PCCs incorporate the Keyless function Additional PCCs can be ordered see page 44 PCC range In order to open a door or the tailgate a PCC must be no more than approx 1 5 metres from 1 Personal Car Communicator see page 46 the car door handle or tailgate This means that the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door must have the PCC with him or her It i
281. salt residue on wiper blades as well as insects ice etc on the windscreen impair the service life of wiper blades For cleaning Set the wiper blades in service position see page 269 Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo Do not use any strong solvents Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car but it cannot reach everywhere Handwashing the car is recom mended for achieving optimum results During the first few months a new car must only be handwashed This is because the paintwork is more sensitive when it is new High pressure washing When using high pressure washing use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car the distance applies to all exterior parts Do not spray directly onto the locks Testing the brakes WARNING Always test the brakes after washing the car including the parking brake to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per formance Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush The heat from the friction causes the brake lin ings to warm up and dry Do the same thing after starting in very damp or cold weather Exterior plastic rubber and trim components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers
282. same time or individually e Driver Alert Control DAC e Lane Departure Warning LDW see page 193 A switched on function is set in standby mode and is not activated automatically until speed exceeds 65 km h The function is deactivated again when speed decreases to below 60 km h Both functions use a camera which is depend ent on the lane having side markings painted on each side WARNING The Driver Alert System does not work in all situations but is instead only intended to be of supplementary assistance The driver always has ultimate responsibility that the car is driven safely General information on Driver Alert Control DAC G017332 The function is intended to attract the driver s attention when he she starts to drive less con sistently e g if he she becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep camera detects the side markings painted on the carriageway and compares the section of the road with the driver s steering wheel move ments The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the carriageway evenly NOTE The camera sensor has certain limitations see page 187 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete riorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads The function is not intended for city traffic In some cases driving ability is not affected despite driver fatigue In which case t
283. se anticlockwise to set the time The set time is shown in the informa tion display The clock can be temporarily replaced by a symbol in conjunction with a message see page 134 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 768 D 03 Your driving environment Key positions Insert and remove the remote control key 03 Ignition switch with inserted remote control key NOTE For cars with keyless function see page 53 Insert the key Hold the end of the remote control key with the detachable key blade and insert the key in the ignition switch After a gentle press on the key it is drawn into the lock IMPORTANT Foreign objects in the ignition switch may jeopardise the function or destroy the lock Do not press the remote control key incor rectly turned Hold the end with the detach able key blade see page 47 Withdraw the key The remote control key is ejected after a gentle press on it Automatic gearbox must be in position P Functions The remote control key s 3 different key posi tions can be reached without the need to start the engine The table shows the functions available in each key position To reach key position I or Il without starting the engine do not depress the brake clutch pedal when the following operations are carried out Key position 0 Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and gently press it The key is drawn in
284. sed for this purpose Track change can also be made by turning TUNING Scan CD This function plays the first ten seconds of each CD track audio file Press SCAN to acti vate Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue playback of the current CD track audio file 04 Random This function plays the tracks in random order The random CD tracks audio files can be scrol led through in the normal way NOTE It is only possible to scroll between random CD tracks on the current disc Different messages appear depending on which random function has been selected e RANDOM means that the tracks from only one music CD are played e RND ALL means that all tracks on all music CDs in the CD changer are played e RANDOM FOLDER means that the audio files in a directory on the current CD are played CD player If a normal music CD is being played activate deactivate under Random If a disc with audio files is being played acti vate deactivate under Random gt Folder CD changer If a normal music CD is being played under Random Single disc or Random gt All discs The option All discs only applies to the music CDs in the changer Ifa CD with audio files is being played activate deactivate instead under Random gt Folder If you select another CD the function is deac tivated Track information If track information is stored on a music CD then it can be shown on the display This also applies to
285. see page 74 2 Press and hold the button on the rear of the rearview mirror use a paper clip or similar for at least 3 seconds The number for the current area is shown 3 Press the button repeatedly until the num ber for the required geographic area 1 15 is shown 4 The display will revert to showing the com pass direction after a few seconds General The sunroof controls are located in the roof panel The sunroof can be opened vertically at the rear edge and horizontally Key position I or Il is required for the sunroof to be opened Horizontal opening Horizontal opening backward forward E gt Opening automatic Opening manual E Closing manual EX Closing automatic Opening For maximum sunroof opening move the con trol back to the position for automatic opening and release Open manually by pulling the control back wards to the point of resistance for manual opening The sunroof moves to maximum open position as long as the button is kept depressed Closing Close manually by pushing the control for wards to the point of resistance for manual closing The sunroof moves to closed position as long as the button is kept depressed WARNING Risk of crushing when sunroof is closed The sunroof s pinch protection function only operates during automatic closing not manual Close automatically by pressing the control to the position for automatic closing and then release it The pow
286. see page 74 2 The remote control key must remain in the ignition switch while the car is being towed 3 Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking 4 Be prepared to brake to stop e The steering lock must be unlocked before towing e The remote control key must be in key position Il e Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off The brake pedal must be pressed about five times harder than normal and the steering will be considerably heavier than normal Manual gearbox Move gear lever into neutral and release the parking brake Automatic gearbox Geartronic IMPORTANT Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward e Cars with automatic gearbox must not be towed at speeds above 80 km h or further than 80 km Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake Automatic gearbox Powershift The 2 0 2 0T and 2 0F models with Powershift automatic transmission should not be towed as the transmission is dependent on the engine running in order to receive sufficient lubrica tion Towing and recovery IMPORTANT Avoid towing e However the car can be towed for a short distance at low speed to move it
287. sfree menu option Mute mode Mute mode involves deactivating the micro phone see page 210 Activate deactivate the microphone using the Microphone on Mute microphone menu option Audio settings Phone call volume The phone uses the front door speakers Call volume can be controlled when the text PHONE is shown at the top of the display Use the steering wheel keypad or VOLUME Audio system volume See page 149 Signals and volume Change the ring signal under Phone settings gt Sounds and volume Ring signals Activate deactivate the message beep under Phone settings Sounds and volume gt Message beep Control the ring volume under Phone settings gt Sounds and volume Ring volume Adjust using y on the navigation button i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 211 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Built in phone Phone book Contact information can be stored on the SIM card or in the phone Storing contacts in the phone book 1 Press MENU and scroll to Phone book gt New contact 2 Enter a name and press ENTER For infor mation on text input see below 04 Enter a number and press ENTER 4 Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory and press ENTER Inputting text See page 209 Searching for contacts See page 208 Erasing contacts Erase a contact in the phone book by select
288. should be treated at three year intervals Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for assistance if the car needs further treatment Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is important to keep the car clean The car s rust proofing needs to be checked regularly and touched up if necessary in order for it to be maintained Cleaning the interior Only use cleaning agents and car care prod ucts recommended by Volvo Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care product Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents Volvo s cleaning agents can also be used for stains on the mat after vacuuming 07 Stains on fabric upholstery and roof upholstery A special fabric cleaning agent available from authorised Volvo dealers is recommended to avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of the upholstery Use water and a synthetic detergent to clean the seatbelts Make sure the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract IMPORTANT Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery Treating stains on leather upholstery Volvo s leather upholstery is chromium free and approved in accordance with the Oeko Tex 100 standard and is treated to preserve its original appearance Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau tiful patina over time The leather is refined and processed so that it retains its natural charac teristics It is given a protective co
289. snow or heavy rain radar waves blocked Resume set speed Cruise control in standby mode is re activated with one press on the steering wheel button O the speed is then set to the last stored speed NOTE A significant increase in speed may arise after the speed has been resumed with D Deactivate The cruise control is switched off with the steering wheel button in standby mode or with one long press in active mode The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with the D button The radar sensor and its limitations Apart from the adaptive cruise control the radar sensor is also used by the Collision Warning with Auto Brake function see page 184 and the Distance Alert function see page 181 The function of the radar sensor is to detect cars or larger vehicles in the same direction in the same lane Modification of the radar sensor could result in it being illegal to use The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis tance The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic weather and road conditions The Function section and onwards informs about limitations of which the driver should be aware before using the adaptive cruise control The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed even wh
290. stations support display of pro gramme type Radio text Some RDS stations transmit information on programme content artists etc This informa tion can be shown on the display Activate deactivate in FM mode under Radio text Automatic frequency update AF This function selects one of the strongest transmitters for a set station The function may need to search through the entire FM wave length to find a strong transmitter If this occurs the radio mutes and Pl Seek Press Exit to cancel appears on the display Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM settings Advanced radio settings gt AF Regional radio programmes REG This function causes the radio to continue with a regional transmitter even if its signal strength is low The symbol REG shows that the func tion is active Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM settings Advanced radio settings gt Regional Enhanced Other Networks EON This function is useful in urban areas with many regional radio stations It allows the distance between the car and the radio station trans mitter to determine when programme functions should interrupt the current audio source 5 Factory settings Activate deactivate in FM mode by select ing one of the options under FM settings gt Advanced radio settings gt EON e Local interrupts only if the radio station transmitter is close e Distant interrupts if the station trans
291. switch 2 Green flashing Charging in pro 3 Fold up the nozzle 1 take a deep breath Functions gress and blow with an even pressure until a click is heard after approx 5 seconds Green Fully charged The result will be one of the alternatives in Vow Semi charged O table Result after breath Red Discharged fit the 4 If no message is shown then the transmis charger in the holder sion to the car may have failed in which or connect the case press button 3 to transmit the result power supply cable to the car manually from the glovebox 5 Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock in its holder G043024 6 Start the engine following an approved breath test within 5 minutes otherwise it must be repeated A Option accessory for more information see Introduction 103 D 03 Your driving environment 03 104 Alcoguard Result after breath test Specification Green lamp Alco Start the engine no guard Approved alcohol content test measured Lamp 5 Dis play text Yellow lamp Alco Engine starting pos guard Approved sible measured test alcohol content is above 0 1 promille but below the limit value in force Red lamp Disap proved test Wait 1 minute Engine starting not possible measured alcohol content is above the limit value in force A Limits vary between countries so find out what limits apply See also the section entitled General information on the
292. t Filling washer fluid lO Air filter High voltage from the ignition system The voltage in the ignition system is highly dan gerous The remote control key must always be in 0 position when work is being done in the engine compartment see page 74 Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the remote control key is in Il position or when the engine is hot Checking the engine oil Volvo recommends Castrol oil products When driving under adverse conditions see page 300 07 Maintenance and service 07 gt gt 07 Maintenance and service 07 Engine compartment IMPORTANT In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine s service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life starting characteristics fuel consumption and environmental impact An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter vals can be applied Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change otherwise you will risk affecting service life starting characteristics fuel consumption and environmental impact Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used Volvo uses different systems for warning of low oil level or low oil pressure Certain variants have an oil pr
293. t For more detailed information on weights see page 293 Ifthe towing bracket is mounted by Volvo then the car is delivered with the necessary equip ment for driving with a trailer e The car s towing bracket must be of an approved type e If the towbar is retrofitted check with your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer e Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket complies with the specified maximum towball load e Increase the tyre pressure to the recom mended pressure for a full load For tyre pressure label location see page 248 e The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer e Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km e The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed e For safety reasons the maximum permit ted speed for the car when coupled with a trailer should not be exceeded Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights e Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long steep ascents e Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12 Trailer cable An adapter is required if the car s towing bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin electrics Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo Make sure the cable does no
294. t format 16 9 In which case a message will appear on the MOISES 4 3 screen ARE 1 TV is an option for the RSE system gt gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 161 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 162 RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system Dual Screen Mode screen Standard mode Zoom Full screen Centered Audio mode Right Left Banner timeout The menus can be displayed for between 8 40 seconds System settings Sound mode Press MEDIA MENU System settings gt Audio mode The original speech for a TV programme can be replaced with speech in another language if the programme is broadcast with several audio tracks Audio Audio 1 e g ENG Audio 2 e g GER Audio mode Right Left Stereo AC3 System settings Factory settings Press MEDIA MENU System settings gt Factory default The system s factory settings are restored here System settings Time zone settings Press MEDIA MENU gt System settings gt Time zone setting For local programme times to be displayed correctly the time zone must be set The GUIDE and INFO button menus and the clock are affected by local time zones Pay channels To watch pay channels a payment card must be fitted in an adapter which is inserted into the digital TV box ini Option accessory for more information see Introduction The box is located under the hatch in the cargo area 1 Open the
295. t a replacement for a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors It can never replace the driver s attention and responsibility The responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests with the driver The system is designed to work most effec tively when driving in dense traffic on multi lane highways When a camera 1 has detected a vehicle inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp 2 illuminates with a constant glow The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault arises in the system If for example the sys tem s cameras are obscured then the BLIS indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown on the information display In such cases check and clean the lenses If necessary the system can be switched off temporarily see the section Activate deacti vate Blind Spot Information System Blind spots G017834 A approx 9 5 m and B approx 3m ting H Button for activating deactivating Option accessory for more information see Introduction rs G021428 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 199 EN 04 Comfort and driving pleasure BLIS Blind Spot Information System BLIS is activated when the engine is started The indicator lamps in the door panels flash th
296. t drag on the ground Direction indicators and brake lights on the trailer If any of the trailer s lamps for direction indica tors are broken then the combined instrument panel s symbol for direction indicators flashes faster than normal and the display shows the text Bulb fail Ind signal trailer If any of the trailer s lamps for the brake light are broken then the Bulb fail Stop lamp trailer text is shown Level control The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant height irrespective of the car s load up to the maximum permissible weight When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly which is normal Trailer weights For information on Volvo s permitted trailer weights see page 295 The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow WARNING Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights Otherwise the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking Manual gearbox Overheating When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating e Do not run the engine at higher revolutions than 4500 rpm diesel engines 3500 rpm otherwise the oil temperature may become too high A Option accessory for more informat
297. t opener Seat adjustment Headlamp control opener for fuel filler flap and tailgate 170 92 93 81 122 256 76 57 62 219 F i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 67 D 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls Right hand drive 006 so coco om OO oA Hazard warning flashers Ignition switch Start stop button Cruise control Combined instrument panel Horn airbags Menu audio and phone control Wipers and washing Headlamp control opener for fuel filler flap and tailgate Door handle Control panel Seat adjustment Bonnet opener Parking brake CC CE 85 74 107 AS 69 73 20 81 130 148 205 92703 57 C2 219 513 Gi 35 Sie 76 250 122 B 6 8 6 6 Steering wheel adjust ment Menus and messages direction indicators main dipped beam trip computer Controls for active chas sis Four C Gear selector Climate control ECC Menu control and audio system 82 85 134 166 170 12 139 130 149 Information displays G041942 The information displays show information on some of the car s functions e g cruise control trip computer and messages The information is shown with text and symbols There are further descriptions under the func tions that use the information displays F i 7 Option accessory for more information see Introductio
298. talk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and release When main beam has been activated the sym bol O illuminates in the combined instru ment panel Active Xenon headlamps ABL a vt q 3 o Headlamp pattern with function deactivated left and activated right respectively If the car is equipped with active Xenon head lamps Active Bending Lights ABL the light from the headlamps follows the steering wheel movement in order to provide maximum light ing in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety The function is activated automatically when the car is started In the event of a fault in the function the oy symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel at the same time as the information display shows an explana tory text and a further illuminated symbol Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment D 03 gt gt 83 D 03 Your driving environment Lighting Symbol Display Specifica tion 01 Headlamp failure Service required The system is disen gaged Visit a workshop if the mes sage remains Volvo rec ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo work shop The function is only active in twilight or dark ness and only when the car is moving The function can be activated deactivated under Car settings Light settings gt Active bending lights For a descr
299. ted in the registration document The labels shown in the owner s manual are not provided as exact reproductions of those in the car The purpose is to show their approximate appearance and location in the car The information that applies to your car in particular is available on the label in question in your car 08 Specifications 01 10 00 11 08 08 Specifications Dimensions and weights Dimensions 011 10 OO 111 G036323 V70 Wheelbase 2816 Front track 1588 B Length 4823 H Rear track 1586 C Load length floor 1878 Load width floor 1158 folded seat Width 1861 D Load length floor 1089 e K Width including door 2106 08 E Height 1547 mirrors F Load height 724 01 10 00 11 08 Specifications Dimensions and weights D A Be ise S o XC70 m o ue Kerb weight includes the driver the fuel tank Wheelbase 2815 Rear track 1570 90 full and all fluids Length 4838 Load width floor 1153 The weight of passengers and accessories and towball load when a trailer is hitched see C N floor 1878 J Width 1861 table page 295 influences the payload and is olded seat i i i K Width including door 2119 not included in the kerb weight D Load length floor 1089 mirrors Permitted max load Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight E Height 1604 F Load height 724 08 G Front track 1604 gt gt 01 10 OO 111 08 294 08 Specifications Dimensions and weigh
300. ter Last 10 missed calls Last 10 received calls Last 10 dialled calls Phone book Search Copy fr mobile phone Bluetooth Change phone Connect phone Remove phone Connect fr mobile phone Bluetooth info for the car Call options Automatic answer Voice mail number Phone settings Sounds and volume Synchronise phone book Main menu Bluetooth Call register Last 10 missed calls Last 10 received calls Last 10 dialled calls Phone book Search Copy fr mobile phone Bluetooth Connect phone Remove phone Connect fr mobile phone Bluetooth info for the car Call options Automatic answer Voice mail number Change phone Car phone Add phone Added phones Phone settings Sounds and volume Synchronise phone book Main menu built in phone Call register Last 10 missed calls Last 10 received calls Last 10 dialled calls Erase list Call duration Phone book Search New contact Copy all Speed dial 11A maximum of 5 phones 9 Applies to cars with built in phone and Bluetooth handsfree Erase SIM Erase phone Memory status Messages Read Write new Delete all messages Message settings Call options Send my number Call waiting Automatic answer Auto redial Voice mail number Diversions Change phone Car phone Add phone Added phones Phone settings Network selection SIM security Edit PIN code Sounds and volume IDIS Reset Phone settings 04 Comfort and driving pleasure D
301. the brake pedal to achieve full brake function Never wait for a collision warning When driving you are responsible for maintaining the correct distance and speed even when the collision warning system is used a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Function G017382 Functions overview Visual warning signal in the event of a col lision risk Radar sensor Camera sensor Collision warning Together with a camera sensor the radar sen sor detects stationary vehicles as well as vehi cles driving in the same direction in front of the car In the event of there being a risk of collision with such a vehicle your attention is drawn with a red flashing warning lamp and a warning sound Brake support If the risk of collision still increases after the collision warning then the brake support is acti vated The brake support prepares the brake system for rapid braking and the brakes are applied gently which may be noticed as a slight jerk If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently quickly then full brake function is implemented even with light pedal force Auto Brake If the driver has not yet started an evasive manoeuvre in this situation and the risk of a collision is imminent then the Auto Brake func tion comes into effect without the driver need ing to touch the brake pedal Braking then takes place with limited brake force in order to reduce collision speed Th
302. the heat auto a set passenger compartment temperature has When the additional heater is active there 2 Press RESET to select between ON and been reached may be smoke from the right hand wheel OFF housing which is perfectly normal Auto mode or shutdown The additional heater can be switched off for short distances if required The menu options are only visible in key position any adjustments must therefore be made before starting the engine 1 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned 2 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned Option accessory for more information see Introduction 147 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 148 Audio system General The audio system can be equipped with differ ent options and is one of the following three basic versions e Performance e High Performance e Premium Sound The system version is shown in the display when the audio system is started Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolby symbol D are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Remote control key and key positions The audio system can be used without the remote control key in the ignition switch for 15 minutes at a time Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch if the
303. the engine is started only recalibration at a workshop can clear the mes sage permanently Cold or hot weather The colder the weather the longer it takes before the Alcolock is ready for use Temperature C Maximum heat ing time sec onds 10 85 10 5 10 60 40 5 180 At temperatures below 20 C or above 60 C the Alcolock requires additional power supply The display shows Alcoguard insert power cable In which case connect the power supply cable from the glovebox and wait until indicator lamp 6 is green 03 Your driving environment In extremely cold weather the heating time can be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors Emergency situation In the event of an emergency situation or if the Alcolock is out of order or has been removed it is possible to bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car All Bypass activation is logged and saved in memory see page 10 in the section Recording data After the Bypass function has been activated the display shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled the whole time while driving and can only be reset by a workshop The Bypass function can be tested without the error message being logged in which case carry out all the steps without starting the car The error message is cleared when the car is locked When the Alcolock is installed either the Bypass or Emergency function is selected as the bypassing option This setting can b
304. the fig 1 ure illuminates and shows which air distribution is selected see page 143 The Auto function automati cally regulates temperature air conditioning fan speed recirculation and air distribu tion If you select one or more manual functions the other functions continue to be controlled auto matically The air quality sensor is engaged and all manual settings are switched off when AUTO is pressed The display shows AUTO CLIMATE Fan speed in automatic mode can be set up under the menu Climate settings gt Automatic blower adjust Choose between Low Normal or High e Low Automatic fan control Low airflow is prioritised e Normal Automatic fan control e High Automatic fan control A more intense airflow is prioritised For a description of the menu system see page 130 Temperature control gr The temperatures on the driver and passenger sides can be set independently When the car is started the most recent setting is resumed Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher lower temperature than the actual temperature required AC Air conditioning on off ON The air conditioning is controlled by the system s jaia Auto function This way incoming air is cooled and dehumidified OFF When the defroster function is activated the air conditioning is switched on automatically can be switched off using the AC button
305. the program ming Erasing programming It is only possible to erase the programming for all the buttons on HomeLink not for individual buttons Depress the two outer buttons and do not release until the indicator lamp starts to flash after approx 20 seconds gt HomeLink is now set in so called learn mode and is ready to be pro grammed once more see page 125 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD 03 127 Menus and Message sicario 130 Climate COMORES D ane eeren 137 Fuel driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater 144 Additional o Pe e 147 AUCTION rondan 148 RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system Dual Screen oocccccnnccncnn 161 AA mf E OOOO Em A 166 DSTC Stability and traction control system 168 Adapting driving ChalaClOliSUGS siciliana 170 y eruise control e as A WAA daptive cruise coo a 173 TE RAT eme OP Le 181 Collision Warning with Auto Brake rs 184 p Drie AS AAN 190 Driver MOE 193 A AA A ee gene edd de wave ctumetdousedesd edeeedecaesentianevtecees 196 BLIS Blind Spot Inforrmai n GyStemv c0s cccccesecessssereesseeeneasees 199 Comfort inside the passenger compartment 202 Bluetooth handsfree cima rena ii mere ee 205 BUIIE IN phone e Pisa re aa 210 128 Option accessory for more information see Introduction COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE wv EN 04 Comfort and drivin
306. ting on a seatbelt Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by press ing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle A loud click indicates that the belt has locked The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear seat 1 Certain markets Releasing the seatbelt Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and then let the belt retract If the seatbelt does not retract fully feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose The seatbelt locks and cannot be with drawn e if it is pulled out too quickly e during braking and acceleration e if the car leans heavily Make sure that you e donot use clips or anything else that can prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly e ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or caught on anything e the hip strap must be positioned low down not over the abdomen e tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder The seatbelts and airbags interact If a seat belt is not used or is used incorrectly this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision Each seatbelt is designed for only one per son Never modify or repair the seatbelts your self Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major load such as in conjunction with a collision the entire seatbelt must be replaced Some of the protective characteristics of the seat belt m
307. tion P or if the car is moving Press twice or hold the button depressed until the engine stops Steering lock 03 The steering lock opens when the START STOP ENGINE button is depressed after the remote control key has been pressed into the ignition switch The steering lock is activated when the driver s door is opened after the engine has been switched off Key positions For information on the remote control key s dif ferent key positions see page 74 General information about starting with Flexifuel The engine is started in the same way as in a petrol engined car In the event of starting difficulties If the engine does not start at the first start attempt e Make further attempts to start with the START STOP ENGINE button If the engine still does not start The outside temperature is lower than 5 C 1 Connect the engine block heater for at least 1 hour 2 Make further attempts to start with the START STOP ENGINE button IMPORTANT Ifthe engine does not start despite repeated start attempts you are recommended to contact an authorised Volvo workshop Engine block heater G025640 Electrical input to the engine block heater When the temperature is expected to be lower than 10 C and the car has been refuelled with bioethanol E85 an engine block heater should be used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quick starting of the engine The lower the temperature the longer the time r
308. tion accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Wheels and tyres 06 243 06 Wheels and tyres 06 244 The original jack should only be used for changing to the spare wheel The jack s thread must always be well greased Tools returning into place G029336 The tools and jack must be returned to their correct places after use The jack needs to be cranked together to the correct position in order to have space The foam block and spare wheel are replaced in the reverse order to taking out Note that there is an arrow on the upper foam block It must point forwards in the car IMPORTANT The tools and jack must be stored in the intended location in the car s cargo area when not in use Ifthe floor hatch in the cargo area flooris not closed then privacy locking does not work see page 49 Winter tyres Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant When driving on winter tyres the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500 1000 km so the studs settle properly into the tyres This gives the tyre and especially the studs a longer service life i Option accessory for more information see Introduction NOTE The le
309. to the collision force to which the vehicle is Location of the front passenger airbag in a right be secured subjected hand drive car s side l The car has an airbag to supplement the pro Do not put objects in front of or above the tection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver s dashboard where the passenger airbag is side It is folded up into the centre of the steer located ing wheel The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG The seatbelts and airbags interact If a seat belt is not used or is used incorrectly this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision e0203 Location of the front passenger airbag in a left hand drive car 01 Safety 9 01 WARNING Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life S 01 Safety Activating deactivating the airbag Key switch off PACOS General information The airbag for the front passenger seat can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch PACOS Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch For information on how to activate deactivate see under the heading Activating deactivating Key switch off switch The switch for the p
310. to the lock 74 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Key position With the remote control key inserted into the ignition switch Briefly press on START STOP ENGINE Key position Il With the remote control key inserted into the ignition switch Press on START STOP ENGINE for about 2 seconds Back to key position 0 To return to key position 0 from position I or Il Briefly press on START STOP ENGINE 03 Your driving environment CD Key positions 0 Odometer clock and tempera ture gauge are illuminated The steering lock is deactivated The audio system can be used 03 l Sunroof power windows 12 V socket in the passenger compart ment RTI phone ventilation fan ECC and windscreen wipers can be used Il The headlamps come on Warn ing indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds All equipment oper ates apart from heated seats and rear window defroster which only work when the engine is running For information on the audio system s func tions with remote control key removed see page 148 Starting and stopping the engine For information about starting switching off the engine see page 107 Towing For important information about the remote control key during towing see page 237 Option accessory for more information see Introduction T9 D 03 Your driving environment 03 76 Front seats G021127 Lumbar support adjustment turn the wheel
311. ton Auto Brake has been active The message clears after one press of the READ button The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged Shown in the event of snow ice or dirt on the windscreen for example e Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor Read about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 187 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Collision Warning with Auto Brake Radar blocked See man Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged ual The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles For example in the event that heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 177 Collision warn Service Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged required e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 04 gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 189 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 190 Driver Alert System DAC General information on Driver Alert System The Driver Alert System is intended to assist drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are driving on The Driver Alert System consists of two differ ent functions which can either be switched on at the
312. ton consult the supplier s manual or contact the supplier via the Internet www homelink com Depress and release the programming button The button flashes for approx 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period Depress the programmed button on HomeLink while the programming but ton is still flashing keep it depressed for approx 3 seconds and then release Repeat the press hold release sequence up to 3 times to conclude the program ming Programming individual buttons To reprogram an individual button proceed in accordance with the following 1 3 Depress the required button on HomeLink and do not release until step 3 has been completed When the indicator lamp on HomeLink starts to flash after approx 20 seconds position the original remote control 5 30 cm from HomeLink Monitor the indi cator lamp The particular distance that is required between the original remote control and HomeLink depends on the programming of the device in question Perhaps several attempts will be required at different dis tances Maintain each position for approx 15 seconds before trying a new one Depress the button on the original remote control The indicator lamp will start to flash When the flashing has changed over from a slow to a rapid flashing release both buttons The rapid flashing indicates successful programming Test the programming by depressing the programmed but
313. ton Press P to select another wavelength 2 Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close Sound stage The sound experience can be optimised for the driver s seat both front seats or the rear seat Select one of the options under Audio settings Sound stage 150 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Optimum sound reproduction The audio system is calibrated for optimum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing This calibration takes into account loudspeak ers amplifiers passenger compartment acoustics listener position etc for each com bination of car model and audio system There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the position of the volume control radio reception and vehicle speed The controls explained in these operating instructions e g Bass Treble and Equalizer are only intended for the user to be able to adapt the sound reproduction accord ing to personal taste 3 Only High Performance and Premium Sound AUX USB and external audio source General G031959 An external audio source can be connected to the car s infotainment system via the USB connec tion or AUX input in the centre console The AUX input enables the connection of an external audio source e g an iPod or MP3 player Read more on page 150 If you choose to connect an iPod MP3 player or a USB memory stick to the USB connec tion the
314. ton on HomeLink and watching the indicator lamp e Constant glow The indicator lamp illu minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed this indicates that the programming is complete The garage door gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed e Glow not constant The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx 3 seconds This proc ess is repeated for approx 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a roll ing code The garage door gate or sim ilar is not activated when the pro grammed HomeLink button is depressed Continue the programming in accordance with the following Locate the programming button on the receiver for the garage door for example normally located close to the antenna s bracket on the receiver If you have diffi culty in finding the button consult the supplier s manual or contact the supplier via the Internet www homelink com Depress and release the programming button The button flashes for approx 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period 2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer 7 Depress the programmed button on HomeLink while the programming but ton is still flashing keep it depressed for approx 3 seconds and then release Repeat the press hold release sequence up to 3 times to conclude
315. ts The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version i e a car with out extra equipment or accessories This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced cor respondingly by the weight of the acces sory Examples of accessories that reduce load ing capacity are the Kinetic Momentum Summum equipment levels as well as other accessories such as Towbar Load carriers Space box Audio system Auxiliary lamps GPS Fuel driven heater Safety grille Car pets Cargo cover Power seats etc Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer taining the kerb weight of your own partic ular car WARNING The car s driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed j PORATION ES G040450 For information on decal location see page 290 Max gross vehicle weight E Max train weight car trailer Max front axle load Max rear axle load Equipment level Max load See registration document Max roof load 100 kg Towing capacity and towball load V70 Engine 2 0F AWD All 2 0 20T 2201 2 0F 251 25l Zell Zone 3 2 T6 AWD D3 D3 D5 Gearbox Automatic MPS6 All except 2 0F with Automatic MPS6 Manual MTX75 Automatic MPS6 Manual M66 Manual MTX75 Manual M66 Automatic TF 80SC Manual M66 Automatic TF 80SC Automatic TF 80SC Automatic TF 80SC
316. ts on all four wheels Brake function changes over to the rear wheels when the car is almost sta tionary Low battery voltage If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can neither be released nor applied Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low see page 111 Applying the parking brake PUSH PULL Parking brake control 1 Press the foot brake pedal down firmly 2 Press the control 3 Release the foot brake pedal and make sure that the car is at a standstill position e When parking the vehicle always engage 1st gear for manual gearbox or put the gear selector in position P for automatic gearbox The symbol in the combined instru ment panel flashes until the parking brake is fully applied When the symbol illumi nates the parking brake is applied In an emergency the parking brake can be applied when the vehicle is moving by depress ing the control When the control is released or the accelerator pedal is depressed the braking is interrupted In the event of emergency braking at speeds above 10 km h a signal sounds during the braking procedure Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill turn the wheels away from the kerb If the car is parked facing downhill turn the wheels towards the kerb Get into the habit of always applying the parking brake when parking on a slope leaving the car in gear or in P if it has auto matic transmission is
317. ts the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds G014338 Do not unscrew the bottle it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage 9 Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes For information on the function of the parts see preceding illustration O ORTAN 6 Unscrew the wheel s dust cap and screw 1 Open the lid of the emergency puncture in the air hose valve connection to the bot Risk of overheating The compressor must repair kit tom of the thread on the tyre s air valve not run for more than 10 minutes 2 Detach the label for maximum permitted ne Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and speed and affix it to the steering wheel start the car 10 Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge Minimum i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Wheels and tyres 06 ad 251 06 252 06 Wheels and tyres Emergency puncture repair TMK pressure is 1 8 bar and maximum 3 5 bar Release air with the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high If the pressure is below 1 8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big The journey should not be continued Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended 11 Switch off the compressor and unplug the cable from the 12 V socket 12 Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit the valve cap 13 As soon as possible drive appro
318. uel consumption and emissions of carbon dioxide Fuel consumption figures may change if the car is equipped with extra equipment that affects the car s weight See information on weights page 293 and table page 304 The manner in which the car is driven and other non technical factors can also affect fuel consumption 05 During your journey Consumption is higher and power output lower for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON Extreme weather conditions driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car s performance 05 05 During your journey General information on loading Payload depends on the car s kerb weight The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car s payload by a corresponding weight For more detailed infor mation on weights see page 293 US The tailgate is opened via a button on the lighting panel or the remote con trol key see page 57 The car s driving characteristics change depending on the weight and distribution of the load 05 To bear in mind when loading e Position the load firmly against the back rest in front Put wide loads in the centre Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests e Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery e Secure all loads to the load retaining
319. uel driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater Fuel driven heater General information about the parking heater The parking heater heats the engine and pas senger compartment and can be started directly or with the timer Two different times can be selected using the timer Here time refers to the time when the car is heated and ready The car s electronic sys tem calculates when heating should be started based on the outside temperature The heater cannot start if the outside tempera ture exceeds 15 C At 5 C or lower the maxi mum running time of the parking heater is 50 minutes The car must be outdoors when the parking heater is used When the parking heater is active there may be smoke from the right hand wheel hous ing which is perfectly normal Refuelling AP tt PD CET VOLVO 31301658 Warning decal on fuel filler flap Fuel which spills out can be ignited Switch off the fuel driven heater before starting to refuel Check the information display to see that the parking heater is switched off When it is running the information display shows Park heat ON Parking on a hill If the car is parked on a steep hill the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel level is t
320. und should therefore always be acti vated On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended which may reduce the capacity to avoid a collision In such situations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability The visual warning signal can be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example If this occurs then the warning sound is activated even if it is deactivated in the menu system e Warnings may not appear if the dis tance to the vehicle in front is small or if steering wheel and pedal movements are large e g a very active driving style WARNING Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic situation or external influences mean that the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a vehicle in front correctly The sensor system has a limited range for stationary or slow vehicles so the system provides less effective warnings or no warn ings at all at a higher vehicle speed above 70 km h for such vehicles Warnings for stationary or slow moving vehicles could be disengaged due to dark ness The collision warning system uses the same radar sensors as adaptive cruise control For Option accessory for more information see Introduction more information on the radar sensor and its limitations see page 177 An absent or late warning could mean th
321. ure DAB senseri 160 AAA APP A 157 Messages and symbols Collision Warning with Auto Brake 188 Distance Alert 182 Driver Alert Control 191 Lane Departure Warning 194 Messages and symbols in the Adaptive Cruise COMO asada 179 Messages in BLIS vssocioioiaiasianadiidic 200 Messages in the combined instrument DANS nd a un 134 Messages in the information display 168 Meters in the combined instrument panel A 70 SH RAOMIETENE sn ttreeerennse 70 tacNOMEl usara dan 70 MIIS ner 141 attending to the windows 137 condensation in headlamps 282 remove with the air vents 143 e A 142 Mobile phone CONTE 208 o mien 205 register phone 205 Oil see also Engine oil 300 Oil level Wisin caca 258 Overheating 231 Owner s manual environmental labelling 12 PAGO dissem 22 PACOS switch ss 22 Paintwork cs Ae 285 damage and touch up 285 Panel li Gs asacscassinacncs asoman 82 Panini Nina naines 45 Parking assistance 196 parking assistance sensors 198 Parking DARK seins 122 Parking heater ssss 144 battery and US 144 parking on a IL 144 AA 146 Passenger compartment 202 Passenger compartment filter 138 Passenger compartment heater TUS e y U q EPA UPA 144 PCC Personal Car Communicator MWC HONG AM nn 45 A a 46 47 POLO Grid E dessine 220 Ph
322. used to demist the windows Activating recirculation Switch between recirculation On Off by pressing the button repeatedly The lamp illumi a nates when recirculation is engaged 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate control Air distribution table Air to windows Some air flows from the air vents The air is not recirculated Air conditioning is always engaged Air to windscreen and side windows Some air flows from the air vents Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents to remove ice and misting quickly to prevent misting and icing in a cold and humid climate not at too low fan speed to enable this to ensure good comfort in warm dry weather to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather Air to the floor and win dows Some air flows from the dashboard air vents Air to floor and from dash board air vents Air to floor Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows Airflow to windows from dashboard air vents and to the floor to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in cold or humid weather in sunny weather with cool outside tempera 04 tures to direct heat or cold to the floor to provide cooler air along the floor or warmer air higher up in cold weather or hot dry weather O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 144 F
323. ust meet the EN 228 standard Most engines can be run with octane ratings of 95 and 98 RON 91 RON should only be used in exceptional cases e 95 RON can be used for normal driving e 98 RON is recommended for optimum per formance and minimum fuel consumption When driving in temperatures above 38 C fuel with the highest possible octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy IMPORTANT e Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as not to damage the catalytic converter e Do not use additives not recommended by Volvo Bioethanol E85 Do not modify the fuel system or its compo nents and do not replace components with parts that are not specifically designed for use with bioethanol Methanol must not be used A decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap shows the correct alternative fuel The use of components not designed for bioethanol engines could cause fire injury or engine damage Reserve fuel can The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol see the NOTE box page 109 IMPORTANT Make sure the reserve fuel can is securely fastened and that its cap is sealed Ethanol is sensitive to sparks and explosive gases could form in the reserve fuel can if it is refuelled with ethanol Diesel Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 standards Diesel engines are sensitive to con taminants such as excessively high volumes of sulphur particles for example Only use di
324. vailable in two variants e Rear only e Both front and rear e Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver s own responsibility during parking e The sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected e Be aware of e g people or animals near the car Function G021417 The system is automatically activated when the car is started and the switch s On Off lamp is illuminated If parking assistance is switched off with the button the lamp goes out a Option accessory for more information see Introduction PA TD Pa D PA Display screens in different situations ab Display in a car with rear sensors only obstacle detected by both right hand sen sors 27 Display in a car with front and rear sensors right hand front sensor is 30 cm or closer to a detected obstacle Display in a car with front and rear sensors no obstacle front or rear detected The centre console display shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacle Marked sectors show which of the four sen sor s detected an obstacle The more marked fields in the same sector the shorter the dis tance between the car and detected obstacle The frequency of the signal increases the shorter the distance to an obstacle in front of or behind the car Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is constant and the ma
325. ven if the audio system is in CD or FM mode for example Refuse or end with EXIT Automatic answer The automatic answer function means that calls are accepted automatically Activate deactivate under Call options gt Automatic answer In call menu Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call to access the following functions e Mute microphone audio system micro phone is muted e Transfer call to mobile the call is trans ferred to the mobile phone 2 Not supported by all mobile phones With certain mobile phones the connection is terminated when the privacy function is used This is normal The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect e Phone book searching in the phone book OLA A new call cannot be started during an ongoing call Audio settings Phone call volume The call volume can be regulated when the handsfree function is in phone mode Use the steering wheel keypad or VOLUME Audio system volume Providing there is no ongoing call taking place the audio system volume is controlled as usual with VOLUME In order to control audio system volume during an ongoing call you have to switch to one of the audio sources The audio source can be automatically muted for incoming calls under Phone settings gt Sounds and volume gt Mute radio Ring volume Go to Phone settings Sounds and volume Ring volume and adjust with 4 W onthe navigation button Ring s
326. ver Alert System Time for a break 145 123 92 191 191 191 194 194 We 01 10 00 11 08 Specifications Symbols in the display Information symbols in the centre Information symbols in the roof console console display display Sym Page Sym Page To bol Audio files A Seatbelt reminder ie Airbag passenger 22 23 Directory in CD disc 153 27 seat activated Traffic information 156 HSA Airbag passenger 23 Phone 205 210 AE seat deactivated Bluetooth TM hands 206 208 free wae Parking assistance 196 Active 08 gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 317 az 09 Alphabetical Index 09 A ACC Adaptive cruise control 173 Active Bending Lights ABL 83 Active chassis FOUR C 170 Active Xenon headlamps 83 PO AD AM ON icacitcisreserusnnessincsnnnsseasnmdenccssnies 110 Adapting driving characteristics 170 Adaptive cruise control 173 FAUIET ACROSS 5 178 o nn 177 Adaptive cruise control fault tracing 178 Additional heater Diese l 147 Adjusting headlamp pattern 87 halogen headlamp 88 Adjusting the steering wheel 81 Airbag activating deactivating PACOG 22 driver s and front passenger side 20 key switch OM c
327. via lists There are three types of basic list which can be used for navigation Audio system e Ensemble Shows channel groups that the receiver has obtained via channel group programming e Service Shows channels irrespective of the channel group to which they are allo cated The list can also be filtered using DAB PTY see below e Subchannel Subchannels to a selected channel The lists can be accessed via the menu The channel groups can also be accessed by pressing ENTER Scanning Scanning means that all channels in the list are played for 10 seconds each Press SCAN to activate Scanning can also be selected in DAB PTY mode In which case only channels of the pre selected programme type are played Stop scanning by pressing SCAN once or by pressing EXIT Subchannel Secondary components are usually named subchannels These are temporary and can contain e g translations of the main pro gramme into other languages If one or more subchannels are broadcast then the gt symbol is shown to the right of the chan nel name in the display A subchannel is indi cated by the gt symbol appearing to the left of the channel name in the display To access a subchannel Press P To navigate between subchannels Press or Pl Subchannels can only be accessed on the selected main channel and not on any other one without selecting it DAB PTY program t
328. warning distance Normal Only use warning distance Short in excep tional cases e g for dynamic driving When the adaptive cruise control is in use the warning lamp and warning sound will be used by the cruise control even if the colli sion warning system is switched off The collision warning system warns the driver in the event of a risk of a collision but the function cannot shorten driver reaction time In order for the collision warning system to be effective always drive with the Distance Alert set at time interval 4 5 see page 181 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 185 EN 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 186 Collision Warning with Auto Brake Even if the warning distance has been set to Long then in certain situations warnings could be perceived as being late E g in the event of large differences in speed or if vehi cles in front brake heavily Checking settings The settings required can be controlled on the centre console display Access via the menu for Car settings Collision warning settings see page 131 Limitations The collision warning system is active from and including approx 7 km h The visual warning signal may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight reflec tions when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead The warn ing so
329. what does apply Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger Volvo has child safety equipment child seats booster cushions amp attachment devices which is designed for your particular car Using Vol vo s child safety equipment provides you with optimum conditions for your child to travel safely in the car Furthermore the child safety equipment fits and is easy to use 1 For information on activated deactivated airbag see page 22 beams under the seat Sharp edges can dam age the straps In the event of questions when fitting child safety products contact the manufacturer Look in the installation instructions for the child for clearer instructions seat for the correct fitting Location of child seats You may place Child seats e _a child seat booster cushion on the pas senger seat provided the passenger air bag is not activated e one or more child seats booster cushions in the rear seat Always fit child seats booster cushions in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he she could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc tions included Do not attach the straps for the child seat to the horizontal adjustment bar springs rails or ad A 01
330. when they are being used by cruise con trol The brake pedal moves when the cruise control brakes Do not rest your foot under the brake pedal as it could become trapped The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver If the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the cruise control s set speed This also happens if the speed of the vehicle in front exceeds the cruise control s set speed The cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way In situations that require rapid braking the driver must brake himself herself This applies with large differences in speed or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily Due to lim itations in the radar sensor braking may come unexpectedly or not at all see page 177 The adaptive cruise control can be activated to follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km h up to 200 km h If the speed falls below 30 km h or if the engine speed becomes too low the cruise control is set in standby mode at which automatic braking ceases the driver must then take over himself herself to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead Warning lamp braking by driver required Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity that is equivalent to approximately 25 of the car s braking capacity If the car needs to be braked more heavily than cruise control capacity and the driver does not
331. ximately 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km h so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre Rechecking the repair and pressure 1 Reconnect the equipment 2 Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge e f it is below 1 3 bar then the tyre is insufficiently sealed The journey should not be continued Contact a tyre centre e fthe tyre pressure is higher than 1 3 bar the tyre must be inflated to the pres sure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table see page 310 1 bar 100 kPa Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres sure is too high Do not unscrew the bottle it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage 3 Make sure the compressor is switched off Detach the air hose and cable Refit the dust cap The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop Check the tyre pressure regularly Volvo recommends that you drive to the near est authorised Volvo workshop for the replace ment repair of the damaged tyre Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid Option accessory for more information see Introduction You should not drive faster than 80 km h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre maximum driving distance is 200 km The staff there can
332. y calls to emer gency numbers can be made without a SIM card The built in phone cannot read 3G type SIM cards Combined 3G GSM cards work Contact the network operator if the SIM card needs to be changed Menus and controls The menus are navigated using the control panel 4 and the steering wheel keypad 3 For general information on menus see page 130 For information on the phone s controls see page 205 If the car is equipped with both Bluetooth handsfree and built in phone then there is an additional menu for chang ing the phone in the phone menu see page 131 ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction On Off Switch on the phone with a short press on PHONE Enter the PIN code if necessary The y symbol shows that the phone is switched on When this symbol is shown calls can be received even if the CD menu for example is shown in the display Briefly press PHONE to use the phone menus and to dial out The text PHONE shows that the phone menu is active Switch off the phone with one long press on PHONE Making and receiving calls Making calls 1 Switch on the phone 2 If PHONE is not shown in the display briefly press PHONE 3 Dial the number or use the phone book see page 211 4 Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up the privacy handset Release the handset by pulling it down Ending a call End a call by pressing EXIT or by hanging up the privacy handset
333. y show a message at the same time as a symbol is illu minated i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment O Gearboxes 03 iS D 03 Your driving environment 03 Gearboxes Transm overheat park safely Transm overheat brake to hold Transm cooling let engine run stant engine speed Significant pulling in the car s traction No drive due to overheated gearbox A For fastest cooling run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the message clears The table shows three steps with an increased degree of seriousness should the transmission become too hot In parallel with the display text the driver is also advised that the car s elec tronics are temporarily changing the driving characteristics Follow the instructions on the information display where appropriate The table s examples are no indication that the car is defective but instead show that a safety function has been activated inten tionally to prevent damage to one of the car s components WARNING If a warning symbol combined with the text Transm overheat park safely is ignored then the heat in the gearbox may become so high that the power transmission between engine and gearbox is temporarily halted in order to prevent the clutch from malfunctioning the car then loses drive and is stationary until gearbox temperature has cooled to an acce
334. ylinder and unlock the door 3 Refit the plastic cover after unlocking When the driver s door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened the alarm is trig gered It is switched off by inserting the PCC in the ignition switch see page 63 Key memory driver s seat and door mirrors PCC memory function If several people each with a PCC approach the car then the settings for seat and mirrors are implemented for the person who opens the driver s door After the driver s door has been opened by person A with PCC A but person B with PCC B shall drive the settings can be changed in three ways e Standing by the driver s door or sitting behind the steering wheel person B 02 Locks and alarm Keyless drive presses their PCC s unlock button see page 45 e Select one of three possible memories for seat adjustment with seat button 1 3 see page 77 e Adjust seat and mirrors manually see page 77 and 97 Lock settings The Keyless function can be adapted by indi cating in the menu system which doors shall be unlocked under Car settings Lock settings Keyless entry For a description of the menu system see page 130 Antenna location G021179 The keyless system has a number of integrated antennae located around the car Tailgate by wiper motor Door handle left rear Roof centre above rear seat O Cargo area central and furthest in under the floor Door handle r
335. you engage an Never drive with deployed airbags They can make steering difficult Other safety Seatbelt tensioner In a frontal collision authorised Volvo workshop to handle the systems may also be damaged The smoke front seat and or side impact replacement of components in the car s and dust created when the airbags are accident and or safety systems deployed can cause skin and eye irritation rear end collision e Always contact a doctor injury after intensive exposure In case of irritation wash with cold water The rapid Seatbelt tensioner In a frontal collision deployment sequence and airbag fabric rear seat may cause friction and skin burns The SRS SIPS IC and belt tensioner sys Airbags SRS In a frontal collision tems are deployed only once during a colli sion Side airbags SIPS In a side impact accident WARNING The airbag control module is located in the centre console If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid discon nect the battery cables Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a col Recovering the car Volvo recommends that lision without airbag deployment A number of factors such you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo as the rigidity and weight of the object hit the speed of the workshop car the angle of the collision etc affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated
336. ype DAB PTY selects one type of radio pro gramme There are 29 different programme types which also include different programme categories After selecting a programme type navigation only takes place within the channels broadcasting that type Exit this mode as follows Press EXIT It is also possible to select a preset channel or exit DAB PTY via the menu In certain cases DAB radio will exit PTY mode when DAB to DAB linking See below is implemented DAB to DAB link It is possible to exit a channel with poor or no reception to the same channel in another chan nel group with better reception There may be a certain delay when changing channel group There may be a period of silence between the current channel no longer being available to the new channel becoming available DAB display settings 1 Basic Only the channel name is shown if a primary component is being played A subchannel name is shown if it is a sub channel being played 2 Ensemble Adds the channel group name to the channel name 3 Ensemble PTY Adds the programme type name under the channel name Preset 10 station presets can be stored per wave length DAB has 2 memories for presets DAB1 and DAB2 The stored presets are selected using the preset buttons A preset contains one channel but no sub channels If a subchannel is being played and a preset is saved then only the channel ID is registered This is because subchannels are tempor
337. ystem 01 Safety 9 01 Correct seating position For the best possible protection the driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint Do not obstruct the WHIPS system Do not leave any objects on the floor behind th driver s seat passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back rest Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system S 01 Safety AA o Ef WARNING If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces such as due to a rear end collision the WHIPS system must be checked Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop Part of the WHIPS system s protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys ra FE tem checked even after a minor rear end Do not place objects on the rear seat that may collision prevent the WHIPS system from functioning WARNING If a rear seat backrest is folded down the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest 01 Safety 9 When the systems deploy 01 When the systems deploy Volvo workshop Do not drive with WARNING yacen ve wi i ystem riggere e Volvo recommends that

Owners Manual - ESD

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents